You are on page 1of 222

Allen-Bradley

Regenerative DC
Bus Supply Unit
(RGU) User Manual
Bulletin 2364F
Firmware 3.02
Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this
publication, those responsible for the application and use of this
control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps
have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all
performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws,
regulations, codes and standards.

The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples


shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example.
Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any
particular installation, Allen-Bradley does not assume responsibility
or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use
based upon the examples shown in this publication.

Allen-Bradley publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the


Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid-State Control
(available from your local Allen-Bradley office), describes some
important differences between solid-state equipment and
electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration
when applying products such as those described in this publication.

Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in


whole or in part, without written permission of Allen-Bradley, is
prohibited.

Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety


considerations:

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices


or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or
! death, property damage or economic loss.

Attention statements help you to:

Identify a hazard.
Avoid the hazard.
Recognize the consequences.
Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful
application and understanding of the product.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Table of Contents

Summary of Changes Changes Since Last Update


Preface Introduction
Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Changes To This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
Overview of Product Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
Firmware Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-4
Contents of this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
Common Techniques Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-7
Receiving Your Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-8
Rockwell Automation Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-8
Local Product Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-8
Technical Product Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-8

Chapter 1 Overview
What is the 2364F? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What does the RGU do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How will the RGU fit into a 2362 drive system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How will the RGU fit into a drive system packaged in FD86N enclosures?
1-2
How Does An RGU Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Primary Electrical Components of Your RGU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
RGU Conceptual Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Descriptions of the Primary Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Motor Circuit Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
3-Phase Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
AC Line, Current-Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
AC Line Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
RGU Power Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Main Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Isolation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Gate Driver Board (and Power Supply). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Control Power Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Control Transformer Fusing (Primary and Secondary) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Description of RGU Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Motoring Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Regenerating Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Diode Bridge Operation (RGU Not Enabled). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
What Happens When 3-Phase Power is Applied to the RGU and the Door-
Mounted Start Switch is Turned On? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Precharge Operation for J, K, L, and M-Code RGUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Precharge Operation for N-Code RGUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
How Does the RGU Control Power Factor in Motoring and Regenerating

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


ii Table of Contents

Modes of Operation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12


How does the RGU allow power to flow during motoring while controlling the
power factor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
How does the RGU allow power to flow from the DC bus to the AC line
(regenerating mode of operation) and control the power factor? . . 1-17
How Does the RGU Control the DC Bus Voltage? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
RGU Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Electrical System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Packaging Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Communication Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
RGU Standard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Electrical System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Packaging Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Year 2000 Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Chapter 2 Your Current Code J RGU (Series A)


Unit Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Electrical Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Chapter 3 Your Current Code K RGU (Series A)


Unit Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Electrical Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Chapter 4 Your Current Code L RGU (Series A)


Unit Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Electrical Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Chapter 5 Your Current Code M RGU (Series B)


Unit Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Electrical Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Chapter 6 Your Current Code N RGU (Series B)


Unit Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Electrical Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Chapter 7 Installing Your RGU


Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Ground-Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Terminal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
RGU Installation Verifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Individual Unit Power-Up Verifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Table of Contents iii

Connecting the RGU to the Drive Lineup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14


Splicing Busbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Testing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Testing the System (Standalone RGU with Inverters). . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Test Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Chapter 8 Setting Up Your RGU


Introduction to the
Human Interface Module (HIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Basic Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Starting the RGU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Programming the RGU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Enabling the RGU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Advanced Startup Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Chapter 9 Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters


Voltage Loop Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Identifying the DC Bus Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Monitoring the DC Bus Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Comparing the DC Bus Reference with the DC Bus Feedback . . . . 9-6
Processing Bus Data and Making Necessary Error Corrections in the PI
Regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Generating a Voltage Loop Iq Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Generating a Voltage Loop Id Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Current Loop Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Iq and Id Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
PWM Saturation Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
DC to AC Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
AC to DC Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Reference Angle Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Chapter 10 Interpreting and Setting Status, Command, and Fault Words


Fault Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Host Processor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
DSP Processor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Chapter 11 Configuring Analog Input and Output Parameters


Analog Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
A/D Value Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
DAC Source Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
DAC Offset Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
DAC Gain Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
DAC Cutoff Frequency Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
DAC Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Analog Output Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Chapter 12 Setting Up Trending

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


iv Table of Contents

Selecting the Parameter to Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2


Setting the Trigger Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Setting the Sampling Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Setting the Number of Post Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Setting the Trend Mode and Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Trending Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Looking at the Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

Appendix A RGU Catalog Numbers


Understanding Catalog Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Determining Catalog Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
RGU Catalog Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Bulletin 2364F RGU Spare Part Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Appendix B Specifications
Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Environmental Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Power Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

Appendix C Physical Details


Physical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Approximate Shipping Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
MCC Structures and Bus Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Wireway Meter Cover Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Recommended Disconnect Trip Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Appendix D Programming Parameters

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Summary of Changes

Changes Since Last Update


The information below summarizes the changes to this publication
since the last update.

Description of New or Updated Information See Page(s)


Corrected original error in figure 6.3 (removed M1 contactor) 6- 4

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


P-2 Preface

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


Preface

Introduction
This Regenerative DC Bus Supply UnitUser Manual provides you
with necessary information and instruction to install and operate your
regenerative, common DC bus supply unit (RGU).

This preface supplies introductory information about this manual,


with the following topics:

who should use this manual


safety precautions
contents of this manual
related documentation
conventions used in this manual
receiving your drive system
Rockwell Automation support

Who Should Use This Manual This manual is designed for qualified personnel who will be installing
or operating an RGU drive.

If you need to gain a foundational understanding of your RGU, please


contact your local Rockwell Automation Drive Systems
representative for information and instruction before using this
product.

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


P-2 Preface

Changes To This Manual The following changes have been implemented in this manual:

Updates for Firmware version 3.02.


Document update (July 1999) regarding Precharge Fuses has
been incorporated.

Overview of Product Updates Table 1: Overview of Product Updates


Item Update
Firmware Updates have been added for Single Phase Detection.

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


Preface P-3

Firmware Compatibility Table 2 shows the firmware versions that may be installed in a
particular unit. Note that Series B, M and N-code units can only
operate with firmware version 3.01 or 3.02, and Series A, M and
N-code RGUs cannot operate with firmware version 3.01 or 3.02.
Current Code Series

Table 2: Firmware Compatibility


CAT 2364FA-MNB SER B
CONSTANT TORQUE Series A Series B
KVA VOLTS A PH Hz
Version
AC INPUT 541 460 678 3 50/60 J K L M N M N
DC OUTPUT 524 683 749 - DC 1.02 Y Y Y Y Y N N
Refer to user manual for
2.01 Y Y Y Y Y N N
installation instructions 2.02 Y Y Y Y Y N N
Data nameplate located on power structure 2.03 Y Y Y Y Y N N
3.01 Y Y Y N N Y Y
3.02 Y Y Y N N Y Y

192390 U 12

1999 V3.01

Firmware Label
(Located on Flash Chip U12)

Main Control Board

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


P-4 Preface

Safety Precautions The following general precautions apply to Bulletin 2364F RGUs and
to drive system lineups:

ATTENTION: Only those familiar with the drive system,

! the products used in the system, and the associated machinery


should plan or implement the installation, startup, and future
maintenance of the system. Failure to comply can result in
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: Only connect Rockwell Automation
common DC bus AC drives to the RGUs common DC bus
output.
ATTENTION: Do not connect any drives to the RGU
common DC bus which have input voltage specifications
greater than the maximum input voltages listed below.

Nominal Input Voltage Maximum DC Input of


of RGU (V AC) Drive (V DC)
380 632
460 746
575 933

ATTENTION: Verify that all sources of AC and DC power


are deenergized and locked out or tagged out in accordance
with requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70E, Part II.
ATTENTION: The system may contain stored energy
devices. To avoid the hazard of electrical shock, verify that
all voltage on capacitors has been discharged before
attempting to service, repair, or remove a drive system or its
components. You should only attempt the procedures in this
manual if you are qualified to do so and are familiar with
solid-state control equipment and the safety procedures in
publication NFPA 70E.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive
system can result in component damage and/or a reduction in
product life. Wiring or application errors such as
undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, and
excessive ambient temperatures can result in the
malfunction of the drive equipment.
ATTENTION: This drive system contains ESD
(electrostatic discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static
control precautions are required when installing, testing, or
repairing this assembly. Component damage can result if ESD
control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar
with static control procedures, refer to Allen-Bradley
publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding Against Electrostatic
Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


Preface P-5

Contents of this Manual

Chapter Title Contents


Preface Discusses the manual layout and provides reference information
1 Overview Presents how the RGU works, and includes features, and standard options
2 Your Current Code J RGU Shows the layout, schematics, and components for the J-code RGU
3 Your Current Code K RGU Shows the layout, schematics, and components for the K-code RGU
4 Your Current Code L RGU Shows the layout, schematics, and components for the L-code RGU
5 Your Current Code M RGU Shows the layout, schematics, and components for the M-code RGU
6 Your Current Code N RGU Shows the layout, schematics, and components for the N-code RGU
7 Installing Your RGU Includes installation procedures, wiring guidelines, and system testing
8 Setting Up Your RGU Instructs how to set up the RGU for operation
9 Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Details on voltage and current regulation
Parameters
10 Interpreting and Setting Status, Command, and Describes how the status, command, and fault parameters operate
Fault Words
11 Configuring Analog Input and Output Parameters Describes how analog input and output can be programmed
12 Setting Up Trending Describes how to program sampling routines
Appendix A Specifications Lists electrical specifications, unit dimensions and shipping weights, and operating
specifications
Appendix B RGU Catalog Numbers Describes catalog numbers for the RGU
Appendix C RGU Details Presents circuit breaker settings, meter-mounting hole dimensions, and enclosure
architecture
Appendix D Programming Parameters Lists and describes the RGU's parameters
Glossary Listing of terms used in this manual
Index Index of key topics in this manual

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


P-6 Preface

Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning


related Rockwell Automation products and related standards. If you
would like to obtain a copy of any Rockwell Automation
publications, please contact your local Rockwell Automation office or
distributor.

For Read This Document Document Number


Information on the GPT (graphic programming terminal) Bulletin 1201 Graphic Programming Terminal User Manual 1201-5.0
Information on the GM1 board for connecting to Remote I/O Bulletin 1203 Remote I/O Communications Module Getting 1203-5.1
Started Manual
Information on the GM5 board for connecting to DeviceNet Bulletin 1203 Remote I/O Communications Module Getting 1203-5.3
Started Manual
Information on the GM2 board for connecting to RS232/422/ Bulletin 1203 Serial Communications Module User Manual 1203-5.5
483 using DF1 protocol and DH485
Information on the 1336 Force drives 1336T User Manual AC Drive 1336 FORCE-5.12
Information on the 1336 Plus drives 1336S User Manual .05-600HP 1336 PLUS-5.0
PLC-5 information PLC-5 Controllers Brochure 1785-1.2
Information about RGU spare parts 2364 Spare Parts Listing 2364-6.0
Information for troubleshooting an RGU Regenerative DC Bus Supply Unit (RGU) Troubleshooting 2364F-5.05
Guide
Information about parallel configurations Parallel ConfigurationUser Manual 2364P-5.01
Additional Information on joining and splicing together MCCs Instructions Joining and Splicing Vertical 2100-5.1
Details on receiving, handling, and storing MCCs Instructions Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor 2100-5.5
Control Centers
Procedures for tasks to be done at the customers site before Bulletin 2300 Installation Manual 2300-5.1
system start up
A description of Drive Tools software Drive Tools Software Brochure 9303-1.0
Information on SA3000 drives SA3000 Binder S-3001
Information on SA3100 drives SA3100 Binder S-3053
Information on FD86N enclosures FD86N Drive Systems Enclosure Hardware Installation S-3062
Manual
An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical National Electrical Code ANSI / NFPA 70 Published by
equipment the National Fire Protection
Association of Boston, MA
An article on safety procedures Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee ANSI / NFPA 70E
Workplaces
A complete listing of current documentation, including Allen-Bradley Publication Index SD499
ordering instructions. Also indicates whether the documents
are available on CD-ROM or in multi-languages
A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Industrial Automation Glossary AG-7.1

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


Preface P-7

Common Techniques Used in this The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
Manual
RGU unit configurations are referred to by their catalog string
current code. For example, a J-code RGU would refer to a 2364F
unit design that has an 85A DC output (380/460V AC input) or
88A DC output (575V AC input). See Appendix A for additional
catalog string and rating information.
References to other manuals and other sections within this
manual will appear in italics. For example, See the section titled
Common Techniques in this Manual.
Attention statements, like the one shown below, indicate
circumstances that may result in personal injury, death, property
damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Attention statements, such as this one,

! identify circumstances that may result in personal


injury, property damage, economic loss, or death.

Some parameters are displayed in bits (from 0 to 15 as shown


below).
Bit
6

0000 0000 0100 0000

Bit Bit
15 0

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


P-8 Preface

Receiving Your Drive System The customer is responsible for thoroughly inspecting the equipment
before accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the
items that you receive against your purchase order. If any items are
obviously damaged, do not accept the delivery until the freight agent
has noted the damage on the freight bill. Should you discover any
concealed damage during unpacking, you are responsible for
notifying the freight agent. In such a case, leave the shipping
container intact and request that the freight agent make a visual
inspection of the equipment.

Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide, with Sales/
Support Offices, authorized distributors, and authorized Systems
Integrators located throughout the United States, plus Rockwell
Automation representatives in every major country in the world.

Local Product Support


Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for:

sales and order support


product technical training
warranty support
support service agreements

Technical Product Assistance


If you need to contact us for technical assistance, please be sure to
review the product and troubleshooting information in this manual
first.

For the quickest possible response, please have the catalog numbers
of your products ready when you call.

Publication 2364F-5.01 August 2002


Chapter 1
Overview

This chapter introduces Rockwell Automations Bulletin 2364F


synchronous line, regenerative DC bus supply unit (RGU).

What is the 2364F? The RGU is designed to be the regenerative front-end of a common
DC bus drive system. RGUs are available with 380V, 460V, and
575V 3-phase input voltages. Read this section for a general
description of RGU functionality and packaging.

What does the RGU do?


Your RGU facilitates bi-directional power flow between the 3-phase
AC input and the common DC bus:

The RGU converts the incoming 3-phase, AC line voltage into a


regulated DC bus voltage by controlling the power flow to and
from the AC line.
The RGU converts an incoming 3-phase, AC line voltage into a
115V AC RGU control voltage via a basic capacity control
transformer (with optional increased transformer capacities
available if you desire to also supply control power to a 115V AC
control bus).

How will the RGU fit into a 2362 drive system?


The RGU is packaged in CENTERLINE Bulletin 2100 motor
control centers (MCC) to be compatible with 2362 common DC bus,
AC drive system lineups. As an added convenience, you can connect
other common bus MCCs to both the right and left sides of standalone
RGUs.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-2 Overview

How will the RGU fit into a drive system packaged in FD86N
enclosures?
FD86N enclosure options permit direct connection to Bulletin 2100
CENTERLINE MCCs that:

are 20" deep


have 1.5"-high base channels
have the DC power bus and control bus (if selected) mounted at a
depth of 16.92" from the front of the MCC

How Does An RGU Work? Primary Electrical Components of Your RGU


The primary electrical components of your RGU are:

a 3-phase motor circuit protector, 3-phase circuit breaker, or a


3-phase motor-operated circuit breaker (depending upon RGU
rating)
AC line, current-limiting fuses
AC line reactors
a power structure
a main control board
an isolation board
a control power transformer
control transformer fusing (primary and secondary)
These items are shown in the conceptual schematic given in
Figure 1.1, then are described in greater detail.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-3

RGU Conceptual Schematic


The conceptual schematic shown in Figure 1.1 presents the basic
building blocks of your RGU.

The 3-phase, incoming AC power is applied to the inputs at the left of


the diagram. This input power is passed through the circuit breaker
(or motor circuit protector), line fuses, the main contactor, and AC
line reactors. These items ensure that the power structure receives
safe, clean power, protected from excessive currents or voltages.

The 3-phase power is then applied to the power structure (which is


controlled by the RGU control board). The power is converted to DC
through the power structure, and sent out the DC bus.

Two of the phases are tapped off the incoming power, and are passed
through line fuses and through a filter, and then transformed through
the control transformer. The secondary of this transformer supplies
control power to the RGU (including the bridge fan motor). As an
option, this power may be supplied to the control bus (fuses and an
appropriate control transformer are required).

Figure 1.1
Conceptual Schematic of the RGU

Circuit
Breaker AC Line
RGU +
or MCP Control Board
Fuses Reactors Bus
Voltage
Light
3-Phase AC DC
Incoming Bus
Power

Main Power Structure


Contactor
-
Filter (This fuse included in
control power source
upgrade options.)

L To Optional
RGU Control Control Bus
Power
N N

Control
Transformer

RGU

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-4 Overview

Descriptions of the Primary Electrical Components


Motor Circuit Protector
The motor circuit protector is the disconnect device between the RGU
and the 3-phase AC source, used to turn power to the system on and
off. It also provides magnetic overload protection. Motor circuit
protectors are standard features in J, K, and L-code RGUs.

3-Phase Circuit Breaker


The 3-phase circuit breaker is the disconnect device between the
RGU and the 3-phase AC source, used to turn power to the system on
and off. It also provides overcurrent trip and magnetic overload
protection. 3-phase circuit breakers are standard features in M and
N-code RGUs.

AC Line, Current-Limiting Fuses


AC line, current-limiting fuses are placed between the circuit breaker
(or motor circuit protector) and the RGU power structure. This fusing
protects the bridge from excessive currents and provides a current-
limiting action that permits a circuit breaker or motor circuit protector
(with a withstand rating less than 65,000A AC fault current available)
to effectively provide an AIC rating of 65,000A AC.

AC Line Reactors
AC line reactors reduce peak currents and harmonics in the AC line
and peak currents of the bridge circuit; they facilitate current flow
from the RGU to the 3-phase AC line during regeneration; and they
act as a known AC line impedance to the RGU which functions as a
power source while motoring or regenerating.

RGU Power Structure


The RGU power structure is the 3-phase power bridge which converts
the 3-phase AC power to DC and DC power to 3-phase PWM AC.

If the RGU is precharged (main contactor closed) but not enabled


(RGU not modulating), the RGU functions as a simple six diode
3-phase rectifier. The six diodes are the freewheeling diodes inside
the IGBTs, which are capable of supplying 100% motoring current to
the DC bus.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-5

Main Control Board


The main control board regulates the power structure operation,
controls other RGU operations according to user settings, and
communicates with external devices via SCANport, analog I/O,
discrete I/O, and R2R (which communicates with other RGUs).

Isolation Board
The isolation board scales input signals (AC line voltage, AC line
current, and DC bus voltage) and output signals to and from the main
control board and protects the main control board from overcurrent
and overvoltage conditions.

Gate Driver Board (and Power Supply)


The gate driver board receives power directly from the high voltage
DC bus. A DC to DC converter on the gate driver board steps full DC
bus voltage down to 24V DC, an additional DC to DC converter steps
the 24V DC down to 15V DC and +5V DC, used to power the RGU
control card.

The gate driver board is connected directly to each IGBT gate lead
through a wire harness. The RGU controls the signals to the gate
drive board which in turn drives the IGBT gates on and off.

Control Power Transformer


The control power transformer steps down two phases of the 3-phase
AC line voltage to provide a single-phase, 115V AC control signal.

Control Transformer Fusing (Primary and Secondary)


Protects the transformer and control circuitry from excessive currents.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-6 Overview

Description of RGU Modes of Your RGU can operate in following three modes:
Operation
Operation Description
The RGU regulates the current and voltage.
Motoring The RGU controls the IGBT switching.
Current flows from the AC line to the DC bus.
The RGU regulates the current and voltage.
Regenerating The RGU controls the IGBT switching.
Current flows from the DC bus to the AC line.
The RGU does not regulate the current or voltage.
Diode Bridge The power structure operates as a diode bridge.
Current flows from the AC line to the DC bus.

This section shows how these three operations work, using the
RGU bridge, shown in Figure 1.2.

Figure 1.2
Typical RGU Bridge

AC
Pow er V bus
Line

IGBT
Free-W heeling
Diode

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-7

Motoring Operation
While motoring, the RGU functions like a boost converter,
controlling the DC bus voltage at a level slightly higher than the peak
of the AC line voltage.

For motoring, the RGU switches the IGBTs (shown in Figure 1.2) on
and off in a determined sequence to produce a series of pulses. These
pulses are varied in width to produce a 3-phase AC voltage with a
nearly-sinusoidal 3-phase AC current. By controlling the magnitude
and phase angle of the generated 3-phase voltage, the RGU can
control the power flow from the AC line to the DC bus (and the phase
angle of the AC line current with respect to line to neutral voltage).

During motoring, the RGU:

monitors the phase angle of the line voltage


uses its own phase-lock loop algorithm to track the AC line
frequency
generates a 3-phase voltage with a controlled magnitude and
phase angle
Figure 1.3 shows the AC line voltage to neutral and AC line current
waveforms of a motoring RGU.

Figure 1.3
3-Phase AC Line Voltage and AC Line Current of a Motoring RGU
Vline To Neutral

Iline

Note: Actual current and line voltage will have some ripple.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-8 Overview

Regenerating Operation
As a secondary function, the RGU can convert DC power back into
AC line power in a process known as regeneration.

To regenerate, the RGU switches the IGBTs (shown in Figure 1.2) on


and off in a determined sequence to produce a series of pulses. These
pulses are varied in width to produce a 3-phase AC voltage with a
nearly-sinusoidal 3-phase AC current. By controlling the magnitude
and phase angle of the generated 3-phase voltage, the RGU can
control the power flow from the DC bus to the AC line.

During regeneration, the RGU:

monitors the phase angle of the line voltage


uses its own phase-lock loop algorithm to track the AC line
frequency
generates a 3-phase voltage with a controlled magnitude and
phase angle
Figure 1.4 shows the AC line voltage to neutral and AC line current
waveforms of a regenerating RGU.

Figure 1.4
3-Phase AC Line Voltage and AC Line Current of a Regenerating RGU at Unity
Power Factor

Vline To Neutral

Iline

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-9

Diode Bridge Operation (RGU Not Enabled)


When the RGU is not enabled, the IGBTs are not modulating. In this
mode, current flows only through the free-wheeling diodes. These
diodes permit current flow in one direction, from anode to cathode.
When an AC voltage is applied to a diode, the output of that diode is a
pulsating DC voltage. This mode is identical to a 3-phase diode
bridge with line reactors.

Operating as a 3-phase diode bridge, the RGU provides an average


DC bus voltage that is approximately 1.35 times the rms line-to-line
voltage. At full load, this average DC bus voltage will decrease to
about 1.24 times the rms line-to-line voltage, due to the line reactors.
Refer to Figure 1.5 for an illustration of the 3-phase AC input voltage
and current waveforms when the RGU is not enabled.

Figure 1.5
3-Phase AC Line Voltage To Neutral and AC Line Current of a Diode Bridge
(RGU Not Enabled)

Vline

Iline

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-10 Overview

What Happens When 3-Phase When the RGUs disconnect is closed and the start switch is
Power is Applied to the RGU and turned on, the RGU will begin its precharge routine. This
the Door-Mounted Start Switch is routine charges the DC bus capacitor bank in a controlled
Turned On? fashion.

Precharge Operation for J, K, L, and M-Code RGUs


Two contactors (M1 and M2) are used to perform the precharge
operation in the J, K, L, and M-code RGUs.

When the disconnect (MCP1 or CB1) is closed and the start switch is
turned on, the main contactor (M1) remains open, the precharge
contactor (M2) closes, and current begins to flow through the
precharge circuit (bypassing the main 3-phase circuit). This
precharge circuit (which has a resistive load) charges up the capacitor
bank. As the bank approaches capacity, the main contactor (M1)
closes, the precharge contactor (M2) opens, and normal operation
begins.

Figure 1.6
Precharge Circuit (J, K, L, and M-Code RGUs)

Precharge Circuit Note: All J-code RGUs have a single phase


Precharge
precharge circuit (on L1 and L2). Older K-N
Contactor code units may also have a single-phase
(M 2) R precharge circuit.
Circuit Breaker
or M CP
(CB1 or M CP1)

+
Capacitor DC
Pow er Structure Bus
Bank

M ain -
Contactor
(M 1)

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-11

Precharge Operation for N-Code RGUs


The precharge circuit for the N-code RGU uses the main disconnect
(motor-operated circuit breaker, CB1) in place of a main contactor.

When MCP2 is closed and the start switch is turned on, the main
disconnect (CB1) remains open, the precharge contactor (M2) closes,
and current begins to flow through the precharge circuit (bypassing
the main 3-phase circuit). This precharge circuit (which has a
resistive load) charges up the capacitor bank. As the bank approaches
capacity, the main disconnect (CB1) closes, the precharge contactor
(M2) opens, and normal operation begins.

Figure 1.7
Precharge Circuit (N-Code RGU)
M otor-O perated
C ircuit B reaker
(C B 1)
+
Capacitor DC
Pow er Structure
B ank Bus

Precharge
C ontactor
(M 2) R
M otor Circuit
Protector
(M C P2)

Note: Older N-code RGUs may have a single-pha


Precharge Circuit precharge circuit (on L1 and L2).

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-12 Overview

How Does the RGU Control Power To understand how the RGU operates in motoring and regeneration
Factor in Motoring and modes, please refer to the example system shown in Figure 1.8, and
the single-phase equivalent diagram of the RGU shown in Figure 1.9.
Regenerating Modes of Operation?
Figure 1.8
RGU Connected to AC Drives

Reactors + DC Bus
Caps DC
V AC RGU V DC M
AC
-

DC
M
AC

AC Drives AC Motors

Figure 1.9
Single-Phase Equivalent Circuit of RGU
Iline
+
XL
Vline VRGU V DC Bus

To understand what happens to the power factor during RGU


operation, we will examine the following:

How does the RGU allow power to flow during motoring while
controlling the power factor?
How does the RGU allow power to flow from the DC bus to the
AC line (regenerating mode of operation) and control the power
factor?
In the upcoming pages, you will find that the magnitude and
phase angle of currents Id (reactive) and Iq (active) will:

control VRGU and V DC Bus

determine whether the RGU is motoring or regenerating


determine whether the power factor is leading, lagging, or unity

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-13

How does the RGU allow power to flow during motoring while
controlling the power factor?
Lets examine the voltage vector diagram in Figure 1.11.
Symbols in the figures are defined as follows:

Vline is the AC line voltage at a 0 degree phase angle

VRGU is the AC terminal voltage of the RGU

XL is the line impedance


Iq is the active current in the AC line (which is shown in phase
with Vline in Figure 1.10)

Id is the reactive current in the AC line (which is shown lagging Iq


by 90 in Figure 1.10)
Iline is the vector sum of Iq (active current) and Id (reactive
current). These currents are controlled by the RGU. (Shown in
Figure 1.10)
Figure 1.10
Motoring Current Vector Diagram, Lagging pf

Iq
V line To Neutral

Id Iline

Note: Iq determines the direction of the current flow. Id


determines the leading or lagging in the power factor.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-14 Overview

When current flows in the motoring direction, the voltages


across the line reactor (XL * Iq and XL * Id) are rotated 90 as
shown as shown in Figure 1.11.

Figure 1.11
Voltage Vector Diagram
V line To Neutral

XL*Iq

V RGU

XL*Id

Figure 1.12 shows what the Iline and Vline waveforms look like
for a lagging pf.

Figure 1.12
Waveforms (Lagging pf, Iq > 0, Id < 0)
V line To Neutral

I line

VRGU is controlled by the RGU to be at the proper magnitude


and phase angle with respect to Vline so that the commanded Iq
and Id exist. In Figure 1.10, Figure 1.11, and Figure 1.12, Id is
commanded to be slightly positive to provide a lagging power
factor, and Iq is commanded to be at some non-zero motoring
current level.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-15

If Id were commanded to be equal to 0, VRGU would be


increased in magnitude and shifted closer toward Vline (to
neutral) as shown in Figure 1.14, then we would have the
condition where the same amount of real current would be
flowing, but now Id would be equal to zero. Iline would be
equal to Iq and in phase with Vline. The power factor is now
unity.

Figure 1.13
Motoring Current Vector Diagram (Unity pf)
Iq = Iline
Vline To Neutral

Figure 1.14
Voltage Vector Diagram

Vline To Neutral

XL*Iq

Please note: XL*Id = 0


VRGU

Notice that in Figure 1.13 and Figure 1.15, Vline and Iline are in
phase with each other and that the RGU is supplying power to
the DC bus.

Figure 1.15
Motoring Line Voltage and Current Waveforms (Unity pf, Iq > 0, Id = 0)
Vline

Iline

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-16 Overview

Now, if Id were commanded to be at some negative level, VRGU


would be increased and shifted closer still to Vline as shown in
Figure 1.17, then we would have the same real current, but Id is
now opposite to the Id in Figure 1.10, and the power factor
would be leading.

Figure 1.16
Motoring Current Vector Diagram, Leading pf

Id Iline

Iq
Vline To Neutral

Figure 1.17
Voltage Vector Diagram
Vline To Neutral

XL*Iq

VRGU

XL*Id

Figure 1.18
Line Voltage and Current Waveforms (Leading pf, Iq > 0, Id > 0)
Vline

Iline

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-17

How does the RGU allow power to flow from the DC bus to the AC
line (regenerating mode of operation) and control the power
factor?
Commanding Iq to be negative causes a phase shift in VRGU in
order to lead Vline which regenerates power to the AC line. If Id
is commanded to be 0, the RGU will operate at unity power
factor as shown in Figure 1.19, Figure 1.20, and Figure 1.21.

Figure 1.19
Regenerating Current Vector Diagram (Unity pf)

Iq = Iline
Vline To Neutral
0

Figure 1.20
Voltage Vector Diagram

Please note: XL*Id = 0


VRGU

XL*Iq

Vline To Neutral

Notice that in Figure 1.21, Vline is 180 degrees out of phase


with Iline, and that the RGU is supplying power to the AC line.
Figure 1.21
Line Voltage and Current Waveforms (Unity pf, Iq < 0, Id = 0)
Vline To Neutral

Iline

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-18 Overview

Figure 1.22, Figure 1.23, and Figure 1.24 show the condition
where the RGU is regenerating power to the AC line and the
power factor is lagging since Id is commanding some positive
value.
Figure 1.22
Regenerating Current Vector Diagram, Lagging pf
Iq Vline To Neutral

Iline Id

Figure 1.23
Voltage Vector Diagram
XL*Id

VRGU

XL*Iq

Vline To Neutral

Figure 1.24
Line Current and Voltage Waveforms (Lagging pf, Iq < 0, Id < 0)

Vline To Neutral

Iline

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-19

Figure 1.25, Figure 1.26, and Figure 1.27 show the RGU
regenerating with a leading power factor since Id is
commanding some negative value.

Figure 1.25
Regenerating Current Vector Diagram (Leading pf)
Iline Id

Iq Vline

Figure 1.26
Voltage Vector Diagram
XL*Id

VRGU

XL*Iq

Vline To Neutral

Figure 1.27
Line Current and Voltage Waveforms (Leading pf, Iq < 0, Id > 0)

Vline To Neutral

Iline

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-20 Overview

How Does the RGU Control the DC The voltage source converter block, shown in Figure 1.28, regulates
Bus Voltage? the DC bus voltage to a set value. This arrangement provides near
unity power factor, allows regeneration, and yields a low line current
distortion.

To maintain constant DC bus voltage, regardless of line voltage


fluctuation, the DC bus voltage regulator changes Iq (the active
current reference), causing an increase, decrease, or reversal in the
power flow from the line to the DC bus.

Iq regulates the amplitude of line current components in phase with


the line to neutral voltage (see Figures 1.13 and 1.15 for unity power
factor). Id (the reactive current reference) regulates reactive
component having a 90 angle with respect to the phase voltage (see
Figures 1.10 and 1.12 for lagging power factor, and Figures 1.16 and
1.18 for leading power factor). The polarity of Id will determine
lagging or leading power factor. The magnitude of Id will determine
how much leading or lagging current will flow.

The pulse-width modulator (PWM), which is between the current


regulators and power structure, provides the gating pulses to the
power structure IGBTs.

The line synchronization unit provides information about utility


voltage phase angles to maintain proper phase angles between the line
currents and line voltages.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-21

Figure 1.28
Voltage Source Converter Block

V*DC

{
Power VDC
Active Iq and
DC Bus I*q Pulse Width Structure
Reactive Id
Voltage Modulator DC Bus
Current
Regulator (PWM)
Regulators

I*d = 0 {
I R IS IT

Line
Synchronization {
Unit
RGU

V R VS VT

Special Applications RGUs with specific hardware modifications and additions can be
placed in parallel with NRUs and/or RGUs in predetermined 2364P
parallel configurations. Refer to publication 2364P-5.01 for
additional information.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-22 Overview

RGU Standard Features RGU standard features include:

Electrical System Features


A 3-phase circuit breaker / motor circuit protector rated for
65kAIC:
J, K, and L-code units have motor circuit protectors
M-code units have circuit breakers
N-code units have circuit breakers for control power with
motor-operated circuit breakers carrying rated bridge
current
AC line, current-limiting fuses rated at 600V AC with short
circuit protection rated at 65kAIC
AC line reactors in a quantity of 1 per phase
A "basic capacity" control power transformer that supplies ONLY
the RGU with single-phase, 115V AC control power
Primary and secondary control transformer fusing (excluding the
control bus fuse that is supplied with the "6P" control power
source upgrade option)
A "DC-Bus-Energized" pilot light that turns on when the bus
voltage is above 50V DC
A DC bus suppressor module
Utilization of #16AWG or #14AWG MTW (PVC insulated)
rated, stranded copper control wiring

Packaging Features
The Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE motor control center (MCC)
packaging makes the RGU compatible with other Bulletin 2100
and 2300 products
Unit depth of 20" (J, K, L-code RGUs), overall unit depth of 25
(M and N-code RGUs)
Ability to connect to other common DC bus MCC sections on
both the right and left sides
Top-entry AC line input
Removable top-plate for cutting conduit holes
Easy accessibility for routine maintenance

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Overview 1-23

6"-high, full-section-depth, horizontal wireway at top of MCC


enclosure
Note: The front-half of the top horizontal wireway is typically
reserved for the routing of control/communication wires.

Motor circuit protectors and circuit breakers are padlockable.


Units have removable power structures
Tin-plated copper horizontal busbars and PE/TE busbars
Standard DC power bus bracing at 65kAIC
Horizontal PE and TE copper bus that is bottom-front mounted
ASA49 gray, baked-enamel finish
Vented unit door(s) with door fan(s) where appropriate
Units come standard with cloth wire labels

Communication Features
Ability to communicate with SCANport devices via ports 1, 2,
and 6, expandable to ports 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6
Port 6 for mounting one of the following optional communication
interface boards directly on the control board stack:
14G1 Remote I/O
14G2 RS232/422/483 (using DF1 protocol) and DH485
14G5 DeviceNet

RGU Standard Options RGUs are available with the following options:

Electrical System Options


Analog DC bus voltage metering
A "Unit-Not-Faulted" pilot light
Analog AC input current metering (phase L1 only)
Standard capacity control transformer to provide control bus
power
Line RC suppressor module
A door-mounted, ground-fault detection meter for RGUs powered
by 3-phase, grounded-wye secondary supplies

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


1-24 Overview

Packaging Options
A door-mounted, ground-fault detection meter-relay
A door-mounted, fault-clear pushbutton
A single-phase 115V AC, 15A duplex receptacle
Note: Customer supplies single-phase, 115V AC power and
wiring to the duplex receptacle.

An audio phone jack


Tin-plated control bus mounted in rear of cabinet above the power
bus
Note: Control bus is included as part of the control power source
upgrade option.

Gasketed unit door areas and door-fan filters


Brady Datab wire labels offering the added protection of a clear
plastic cover on top of the labels
Note: Units come standard with cloth wire labels

Door mounted HIM (programmer only) or a door-mounted


SCANport connector

Communication Options
14G1 board for connecting to Remote I/O
14G2 board for connecting to RS232/422/483 (using DF1
protocol) and DH485
14G5 board for connecting to Device Net

Year 2000 Ready The RGU is Year 2000 Ready. When the RGU is interfaced with
hardware, firmware, and software that will properly exchange
unambiguous data and that will not impede the performance of the
RGU, the RGU will function consistently without interruption for all
valid dates, and will recognize the year 2000 as a leap year. See the
Allen-Bradley website, www.ab.com, for further details.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 2

Input DC Bus Your Current Code J RGU (Series A)


Rated DC Bus
Voltage Current
(V AC) (A DC)
kW This chapter provides the following information for the current code J
380 85 49
RGU:
460 85 59
575 88 74 a typical cabinet layout diagram (Figure 2.1)
a typical electrical schematic (Figure 2.2)
a typical RGU power structure schematic (Figure 2.3)
a symbol-to-component reference table for interpreting the
electrical schematic (Table 2.1)

Unit Layout Figure 2.1


Typical Current Code J RGU Layout
C u stom er 3-Phase
A C Inp ut

AM1 VM1

EA10

MCP1
EA4
SP1-4
F14,
F15, EA3
F16 CT1

F4, F1 F2 F3
F6

TB2
TB1
F17
F18
F19

Power Structure
(EA1)
F10
F9

F8
F7

EA2

TR1 CR2 M2
R13
R14 M1

PT1
CH11

CH1 CH2 CH3

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


2-2 Your Current Code J RGU (Series A)

Electrical Schematic Figure 2.2


Typical Current Code J RGU Schematic
3-Phase
AC Input

CB1

"

CT1
AM1

Ammeter

!
EA3 F14
L1
Line RC F15
Snubber L2
F16
L3
COMMON

SP4 SP1

SP2
PE
SP3

A
(Go To Next Page)

#
To Power Transformer
Grounding Resistor

TB2-1 TB2-2
115 VAC NRU
Control
Power
VM2 10 12 9 7
(Input) (115VAC)

Meter Relay

2 4 6

TB1-7
Contact To
Monitoring PE
TB1-8
Circuit

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code J RGU (Series A) 2-3

A
(From Previous Page)

F6 EA10 Control Pow er Filter

C1 CH2 R1
CH1
F4

$ PT1
(X1) (X2)
115 VAC
F8 F7
M TR1 - 2 PE
TB 1-9

TB1-10

AUX-CR
Optional (Isolation Board)
R em ote CR2
TB 1-1 Interlock TB 1-2
(JM PR)
1 4
TB6 TB6
PL2

% Not Faulted

N
L1

D
(See Figure 2.3)
115 VA C RGU
C ontrol Pow er

$
1 15 VA C
Control Bus to Inverter U nits

F1 F2 F3

CR2
B CR2-13 CR2-14

TB1-5 TB1-6
Pow er Structure (EA1)
(Refer to Figure 2.3)
C

- +
EA4 FOOTNOTES:
DC Bus
Suppressor
PE " Door-m ounted am m eter option.
! Line RC suppressor option.
# Ground fault detection option
EA2
F1
Bus Indicator
R1 $ Control bus option.
+ BU S
F2 R2
LED1
% Unit-not-faulted pilot light option.
-BU S LED2 PL1 & DC bus voltm eter option.

& VM1

DC Horizontal Bus to Inverter Units

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


2-4 Your Current Code J RGU (Series A)

Figure 2.3
Typical RGU Power Structure Schematic
M2
F9 R13

M1 CH11 E
CH1
R Continued on
Next Page
CH2
B S
Continued from CH3
Figure 2.2
T
F10 R14

F
Continued from F17 Rs Continued on
Figure 2.2
Next Page
D F18 Ss

F19 Ts G
Continued on
Next Page
BRIDGE FAN
AC

RTN
BRIDGE THERMAL H
SENSOR (NTC)
TO PE Continued on
GROUND Next Page

TO MAIN CONTROL BOARD J6


P1 J7
J1-20
J1-16
J1-12

J1-1

J1-6
TB5
1 Enable TB3
" S11 1
BURDEN
2 Fault-Clear RESISTOR
(T)
M1 2
3 External Main
TB2
4 Common
1
Not Used
OFF ON TB6 2
6
S12 TB1
Bus
8
Control 1
BURDEN
9 RESISTOR
(R)
TR1 2

TR1 M1 M2
SW1
J2

I
TR1 M1 115V AC
Continued on
Next Page
1
To Fault
Indication Auxiliary
3
Circuitry Control
(page 2-3)
4
Isolation Board
FOOTNOTE:

" Fault-clear pushbutton option.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code J RGU (Series A) 2-5

F1
E +

Continued from C
Previous Page
- Continued in
Capacitor Figure 3.2
Bank

Snubber PCB

CT1

F
CT3

Continued from
Previous Page

PE
G PE PE

Continued from
Previous Page
TE
TE
H TE

Continued from
Previous Page

J7 J8 J10

TB7
Gate Drivers
2
1
F1 24V
TE PE
DC-to-DC P13
Convertor
Main Bus
DC-to-DC
Convertor TB4
1
TP3 TP5 TP6 TP4 TP8 TP9
2
PE
Gate Driver Board +24V +15V -15V +5V +12V -12V
J1

J3 J11
Main Control Board
TB1
- Analog In 1 1
LED Indicators
+ Analog In 1 2

+15V -15V +5V Host DSP Enable SCANport R2R OK Analog In 1 Common 3
Fault Fault OK - Analog In 2 4
J12

I + Analog In 2 5

Continued from Analog In 2 Common 6


Previous Page Analog Out 1 7
Analog Out Common 8
Analog Out 2 9
SCAN ID1 SCAN ID2 RIO EXT
Analog Out 2 Common 10
J10 J9 J8

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


2-6 Your Current Code J RGU (Series A)

Table 2.1 Current Code J RGU Symbol to Component Cross Reference

AC 3-Phase Input Voltage


Symbol Description Option " 380V AC 460V AC 575V AC
AM1 Ammeter monitoring L1 400A AC
MCP1 Motor Circuit Protector 150AHMCP
CH1- 3 Input line reactors 1193uH 1193uH 1853uH
CR2 Fault relay 2 NO/ 2 NC
CT1 Current transducer 100:5
CT1, 3 (EA1) Current transducers (on EA1) 1000:1, 0-150A range
EA1 Power structure
EA2 Bus indicator PCB
EA3 Line RC suppressor PCB
EA4 DC bus suppressor assembly
EA10 Control power filter For 4kHz carrier frequency
F1 (EA1) DC bus fuse (on EA1) 125A 125A 120A
F1 (gate drv) Power supply fuse (on gate driver PCB) 1A, KTK-R
F1 - 2 (EA2) Bus indicator PCB fuses (on EA2) 1A, 1000V, KVR, 1-3/32" diameter, 3" length, 500AIC
F1 - 3 Incoming 3-phase, line fuses 125A, A70P
F4, F6 Primary fuse for a 2 kVA control 10A, KLDR 9A, KLDR 8A, KLDR
transformer
Primary fuse for a 5 kVA control 25A, KLDR 20A, KLDR 17.5A, KLDR
transformer
F7 RGU control power fuse 3.5A, KLDR
F8 Control bus fuse for a 5 kVA control 35A, FRN
transformer
F9, F10 Precharge fuses 10A, KLDR 10A, KLDR 15A, KLDR
F14 - 16 RC suppressor fuses 25A, KTK
F17 - 19 AC line sensor fuses 1A, KLDR
M1 Main contactor 110A
M2 Precharge contactor 12A
MTR1, 2 Door-mounted fan 7", 340CFM
PL1 DC-Bus-Energized pilot light 24V AC/DC, red, 800MR
PL2 Unit-Not-Faulted pilot light 115V AC, amber, 800MR
PT1 Control power transformer A 2kVA control transformer is standard, and a 5kVA control transformer is
available as an option. This transformer has multiple taps to accomodate 380,
460, and 575 V AC primary voltages.
R13, R14 Precharge Resistors 6 ohm, 345 W
S11 Fault clear pushbutton 1 NO, 800MR
S12 Start switch 1 NO/ 1 NC, 800MR
SP1 - 3 Line-to-line MOVs 460 J, 320V AC 460 J, 320V AC 550 J, 385V AC
SP4 Neutral-to-ground MOV 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC
TB1 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 10 terminals
TB2 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 2 terminals
TR1 Timer Relay 2 NO/ 2 NC (instantaneous), 1NO / 1 NC (on delay)
VM1 DC bus voltmeter 1000V DC
VM2 Ground fault detection 0-440V AC (meter), NO/NC contacts (relay)
" These components are provided with RGU standard options. Not all RGUs will have these components.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 3

Input DC Bus Your Current Code K RGU (Series A)


Rated DC Bus
Voltage Current
(V AC) (A DC)
kW This chapter provides the following information for the current code
380 200 116
K RGU:
460 201 141 a typical cabinet layout diagram (3)
575 201 170
a typical electrical schematic (Figure 3.2)
a typical RGU power structure schematic (Figure 3.3)
a symbol-to-component reference table for interpreting the
electrical schematic (Table 3.1)

Unit Layout Figure 3.1


Typical Current Code K RGU Layout
Custom er 3-Phase
A C Input

AM1 VM1

EA10

MCP1
TB2 EA4
EA3
TB1

F14,
F8 F15,
F16
CT1
SP1
SP3

F1 F2 F3
SP2
SP4

Power Structure
(EA1)
TR1 CR2 M2

M1
F4, F7
F6

EA2
F2
F3
F4

PT1
F17
F18
F19

CH1 CH2 CH3

MOUNTED ON ROLL-OUT FRAME

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


3-2 Your Current Code K RGU (Series A)

Electrical Schematic Figure 3.2


Typical Current Code K RGU Schematic

3-Phase
AC Input

CB1

"

CT1
AM1

Ammeter

!
EA3 F14
L1
Line RC F15
Snubber L2
F16
L3
COMMON

SP4 SP1

SP2
PE
SP3

A
(Go To Next Page)

#
To Power Transformer
Grounding Resistor

TB2-1 TB2-2
115 VAC NRU
Control
Power
VM2 10 12 9 7
(Input) (115VAC)

Meter Relay

2 4 6

TB1-7
Contact To
Monitoring PE
TB1-8
Circuit

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code K RGU (Series A) 3-3

Figure 3.3
Typical RGU Power Structure Schematic

A
(From Previous Page)

F6 EA10 Control Pow er Filter

C1 CH2 R1
CH1
F4

$ PT1
(X1) (X2)
115 VAC
F8 F7
M TR1 - 4 PE
TB 1-9

TB1-10

AUX-CR
Optional (Isolation Board)
R em ote CR2
TB 1-1 Interlock TB 1-2
(JM PR)
1 4
TB6 TB6
PL2

% Not Faulted

N
L1

D
(See Figure 3.3)
115 VA C RGU
C ontrol Pow er

$
1 15 VA C
Control Bus to Inverter U nits

F1 F2 F3

B C R2-13
CR2
CR2-14

Pow er Structure (EA1) TB 1-5 TB1-6

(Refer to Figure 3.3)

- +
EA4 FOOTNOTES:
DC Bus
Suppressor
PE " Door-m ounted am m eter option.
! Line RC suppressor option.
# Ground fault detection option
EA2
F1
Bus Indicator
R1 $ Control bus option.
+ BU S
F2 R2
LED1
% Unit-not-faulted pilot light option.
-BU S LED2 PL1 & DC bus voltm eter option.

& VM1

DC Horizontal Bus to Inverter Units

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


3-4 Your Current Code K RGU (Series A)

M2
F2 R10

F3 R11 !
E
F4 R12
Continued on
Next Page
M1 CH11
CH1
R
CH2
B S
Continued from CH3
Figure 3.2
CT1
T
F
Continued from F17 Rs CT3
Continued on
Figure 3.2
Next Page
D F18 Ss

F19 Ts

BRIDGE FAN
AC

RTN

BRIDGE THERMAL
G
SENSOR (NTC)
TO PE Continued on
GROUND Next Page

TO MAIN CONTROL BOARD J6


J7 P1
J1-20
J1-16
J1-12

J1-1

J1-6
TB5
1 Enable TB3
" S11 1
BURDEN
2 Fault-Clear RESISTOR
(T)
M1 2
3 External Main
TB2
4 Common 1
Not Used
TB6 2
6
TB1
Bus
8 1
Control
BURDEN
9 RESISTOR
(R)
TR1 2

OFF ON
TR1 M1 M2
SW1
S12
J2

H
TR1 M1 115V AC
Continued on
Next Page
1
To Fault
Indication Auxiliary
3
Circuitry Control
(page 3-3)
FOOTNOTES: 4
Isolation Board
" Fault-clear pushbutton option.
! This phase of the precharge circuit may
not be present in older units.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code K RGU (Series A) 3-5

F1
E +

Continued from C
Previous Page
- Continued in
Capacitor Figure 3.2
Bank

Continued from
Previous Page

PE
Snubber PCB

Snubber PCB

Snubber PCB
PE PE

TE
TE
G TE

Continued from
Previous Page

J7 J8 J10

TB7
Gate Drivers
2
1
F1 24V
TE PE
DC-to-DC P13
Convertor
Main Bus
DC-to-DC
Convertor TB4
1
TP3 TP5 TP6 TP4 TP8 TP9
2
PE
Gate Driver Board +24V +15V -15V +5V +12V -12V
J1

J3 J11
Main Control Board
TB1
- Analog In 1 1
LED Indicators
+ Analog In 1 2
+15V -15V +5V Host DSP Enable SCANport R2R OK Analog In 1 Common 3
Fault Fault OK
- Analog In 2 4
J12

H + Analog In 2 5

Continued from Analog In 2 Common 6


Previous Page Analog Out 1 7
Analog Out 1 Common 8
Analog Out 2 9
SCAN ID1 SCAN ID2 RIO EXT
Analog Out 2 Common 10
J10 J9 J8

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


3-6 Your Current Code K RGU (Series A)

Table 3.1 Current Code K RGU Symbol to Component Cross Reference


AC 3-Phase Input Voltage
Symbol Description Option " 380V AC 460V AC 575V AC
AM1 Ammeter monitoring L1 200A AC
CH1- 3 Input line reactors 510uH 510uH 832uH
CR2 Fault relay 2 NO/ 2 NC
CT1 Current transducer 200:5
CT1, 3 (EA1) Current transducers (on EA1) 2000:1, 0-750A range
EA1 Power structure
EA2 Bus indicator PCB
EA3 Line RC suppressor PCB
EA4 DC bus suppressor assembly
EA10 Control power filter For 4kHz carrier frequency
F1 (EA1) DC bus fuse (on EA1) 350A, 700V
F1 (gate drv) Power supply fuse (on gate driver PCB) 1A, KTK-R
F1 - 2 (EA2) Bus indicator PCB fuses (on EA2) 1A, 1000V, KVR, 1-3/32" diameter, 3" length, 500AIC
F1 - 3 Incoming 3-phase, line fuses 250A, 170M
F2 - 4 (EA1) Precharge fuses (on EA1) 15A, CCMR 15A, CCMR 15A, CCMR
F4, F6 Primary fuse for a 2 kVA control 10A, KLDR 9A, KLDR 8A, KLDR
transformer
Primary fuse for a 5 kVA control 25A, KLDR 20A, KLDR 17.5A, KLDR
transformer
F7 RGU control power fuse 5A, KLDR
F8 Control bus fuse for a 5 kVA control 35A, FRN
transformer
F14 - 16 RC suppressor fuses 25A, KTK
F17 - 19 (EA1) AC line sensor fuses (on EA1) 1A, KLDR
M1 Main contactor 180A
M2 Precharge contactor 12A
MCP1 Motor Circuit Protector 250A HMCP
MTR1 - 4 Door-mounted fan 7", 340CFM
PL1 DC-Bus-Energized pilot light 24V AC/DC, red, 800MR
PL2 Unit-Not-Faulted pilot light 115V AC, amber, 800MR
PT1 Control power transformer A 2kVA control transformer is standard, and a 5kVA control transformer is
available as an option. This transformer has multiple taps to accommodate
380, 460, and 575V AC primary voltages
R10 - 12 Precharge Resistors 6 ohm, 345 W
S12 Start switch 1 NO/ 1 NC, 800MR
SP1 - 3 Line-to-line MOVs 460 J, 320V AC 460 J, 320V AC 550 J, 385V AC
SP4 Neutral-to-ground MOV 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC
TB1 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 10 terminals
TB2 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 2 terminals
TR1 Timer Relay 2 NO/ 2 NC (instantaneous), 1NO / 1 NC (on delay)
VM1 DC bus voltmeter 1000V DC
VM2 Ground fault detection 0-440V AC (meter), NO/NC contacts (relay)
" These components are provided with RGU standard options. Not all RGUs will have these components.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 4

Input DC Bus Your Current Code L RGU (Series A)


Rated DC Bus
Voltage Current
(V AC) (A DC)
kW This chapter provides the following information for the current code
380 363 211
L RGU:
460 364 255
575 326 276 a typical cabinet layout diagram (Figure 4.1)
a typical electrical schematic (Figure 4.2)
a typical RGU power structure schematic (Figure 4.3)
a symbol-to-component reference table for interpreting the
electrical schematic (Table 4.1)

Unit Layout Figure 4.1


Typical Current Code L RGU Layout
C ustom er 3-Phase
A C Inp ut

AM1 VM1

EA10

MCP1
TB2 EA4
EA3
TB1

F14,
F8 F15,
F16
CT1
SP1
SP3

F1 F2 F3
SP2
SP4

Power Structure
(EA1)
M2 TR1
CR2

M1
F4, F7
F6

EA2
F2
F3
F4

PT1
F17
F18
F19

CH1 CH2 CH3

MOUNTED ON ROLL-OUT FRAME

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


4-2 Your Current Code L RGU (Series A)

Electrical Schematic Figure 4.2


Typical Current Code L RGU Schematic
3-Phase
AC Input

CB1

"

CT1
AM1

Ammeter

!
EA3 F14
L1
Line RC F15
Snubber L2
F16
L3
COMMON

SP4 SP1

SP2
PE
SP3

A
(Go To Next Page)

#
To Power Transformer
Grounding Resistor

TB2-1 TB2-2
115 VAC NRU
Control
Power
VM2 10 12 9 7
(Input) (115VAC)

Meter Relay

2 4 6

TB1-7
Contact To
Monitoring PE
TB1-8
Circuit

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code L RGU (Series A) 4-3

A
(From Previous Page)

F6 EA10 Control Pow er Filter

C1 CH2 R1
CH1
F4

$ PT1
(X1) (X2)
115 VAC
F8 F7
M TR1 - 4 PE
TB 1-9

TB1-10

AUX-CR
Optional (Isolation B oard)
R em ote CR2
TB 1-1 Interlock TB 1-2
(JM PR)
1 4
TB6 TB6
PL2

% Not Faulted

N
L1

D
(See Figure 4.3)
115 VA C RGU
C ontrol Pow er

$
1 15 VA C
Control Bus to Inverter U nits

F1 F2 F3

B CR2
C R2-13 C R2-14

Pow er Structure (EA1) TB1-5 TB 1-6

(Refer to Figure 4.3)


C

- +
EA4 FOOTNOTES:
DC Bus
Suppressor
PE " Door-m ounted am m eter option.
! Line RC suppressor option.
# Ground-fault detection option
EA2
F1
Bus Indicator
R1 $ Control bus option.
+ BU S
F2 R2
LED1
% Unit-not-faulted pilot light option.
-BU S LED2 PL1 & DC bus voltm eter option.

& VM1

DC Horizontal Bus to Inverter Units

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


4-4 Your Current Code L RGU (Series A)

Figure 4.3
Typical RGU Power Structure Schematic
M2
F2 R10

F3 R11 !
E
F4 R12
Continued on
Next Page
M1 CH11
CH1
R
CH2
B S
Continued from CH3
Figure 4.2 CT1
T
F
Continued from F17 Rs CT3
Continued on
Figure 4.2
Next Page
D F18 Ss

F19 Ts

BRIDGE FAN
AC

RTN

BRIDGE THERMAL
SENSOR (NTC) G
TO PE Continued on
GROUND Next Page
TO MAIN CONTROL BOARD J6

J7 P1
J1-20
J1-16
J1-12

J1-1

J1-6
TB5
1 Enable TB3
" S11 1
BURDEN
2 Fault-Clear RESISTOR
(T)
M1 2
3 External Main
TB2
4 Common
1
Not Used
TB6 2
6
TB1
Bus
8
Control 1
BURDEN
9 RESISTOR
(R)
TR1 2

OFF ON
TR1 M1 M2
SW1
S12
J2

H
TR1 M1 115V AC
Continued on
Next Page
1
To Fault
Indication Auxiliary
3
Circuitry Control
(page 4-3)
FOOTNOTES: 4
Isolation Board
" Fault-clear pushbutton option.
! This phase of the precharge circuit may
not be present in older units.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code L RGU (Series A) 4-5

F1
E +

Continued from C
Previous Page
- Continued in
Capacitor Figure 3.2
Bank

Continued from
Previous Page

PE
Snubber PCB

Snubber PCB

Snubber PCB
PE PE

TE
TE
G TE

Continued from
Previous Page

J7 J8 J10

TB7
Gate Drivers
2
1
F1 24V
TE PE
DC-to-DC P13
Convertor
Main Bus
DC-to-DC
Convertor TB4
1
TP3 TP5 TP6 TP4 TP8 TP9
2
PE
Gate Driver Board +24V +15V -15V +5V +12V -12V
J1

J3 J11
Main Control Board
TB1
LED Indicators - Analog In 1 1
+ Analog In 1 2
+15V -15V +5V Host DSP Enable SCANport R2R OK
Fault Fault OK Analog In 1 Common 3
- Analog In 2 4
J12

H + Analog In 2 5

Continued from Analog In 2 Common 6


Previous Page Analog Out 1 7
Analog Out 1 Common 8
Analog Out 2 9
SCAN ID1 SCAN ID2 RIO EXT
Analog Out 2 Common 10
J10 J9 J8

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


4-6 Your Current Code L RGU (Series A)

Table 4.1 Current Code L RGU Symbol to Component Cross Reference


AC 3-Phase Input Voltage
Symbol Description Option " 380V AC 460V AC 575V AC
AM1 Ammeter monitoring L1 400A AC
CH1- 3 Input line reactors 317uH 317uH 404uH
CR2 Fault relay 2 NO/ 2 NC
CT1 Current transducer 400:5
CT1, 3 (EA1) Current transducers (on EA1) 4000:1, 0-1500A range
EA1 Power structure
EA2 Bus indicator PCB
EA3 Line RC suppressor PCB
EA4 DC bus suppressor assembly
EA10 Control power filter For 2kHz carrier frequency
F1 (EA1) DC bus fuse (on EA1) 600A, 700V
F1 (gate drv) Power supply fuse (on gate driver PCB) 1A, KTK-R
F1 - 2 (EA2) Bus indicator PCB fuses (on EA2) 1A, 1000V, KVR, 1-3/32" diameter, 3" length, 500AIC
F1 - 3 Incoming 3-phase, line fuses 500A, 170M
F2 - 4 (EA1) Precharge fuses (on EA1) 15A, CCMR 15A, CCMR 15A, CCMR
F4, F6 Primary fuse for a 5 kVA control transformer 25A, KLDR 20A, KLDR 17.5A, KLDR
F7 RGU control power fuse 9A, KLDR
F8 Control bus fuse for a 5 kVA control 30A, KLDR
transformer
F14 - 16 RC suppressor fuses 25A, KTK
F17 - 19 (EA1) AC line sensor fuses (on EA1) 1A, KLDR
M1 Main contactor 250A
M2 Precharge contactor 12A
MCP1 Motor Circuit Protector 400A, HMCP
MTR1 - 4 Door-mounted fan 7", 340CFM
PL1 DC-Bus-Energized pilot light 24V AC/DC, red, 800MR
PL2 Unit-Not-Faulted pilot light 115V AC, amber, 800MR
PT1 Control power transformer A 5kVA control transformer is standard. This transformer has multiple taps to
accommodate 380, 460, and 575V AC primary voltages.
R10 - 12 Precharge Resistors 6 ohm, 345 W
S11 Fault clear pushbutton 1 NO, 800MR
S12 Start switch 1 NO/ 1 NC, 800MR
SP1 - 3 Line-to-line MOVs 460 J, 320V AC 460 J, 320V AC 550 J, 385V AC
SP4 Neutral-to-ground MOV 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC
TB1 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 10 terminals
TB2 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 2 terminals
TR1 Timer Relay 2 NO/ 2 NC (instantaneous), 1NO / 1 NC (on delay)
VM1 DC bus voltmeter 1000V DC
VM2 Ground fault detection 0-440V AC (meter), NO/NC contacts (relay)
" These components are provided with RGU standard options. Not all RGUs will have these components.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 5

Input DC Bus Your Current Code M RGU (Series B)


Rated DC Bus
Voltage Current
(V AC) (A DC)
kW This chapter provides the following information for the current code
380 746 433
M RGU:
460 749 524 a typical cabinet layout diagram (5)
575 686 582
a typical electrical schematic (Figure 5.2)
a typical RGU power structure schematic (Figure 5.3)
a symbol-to-component reference table for interpreting the
electrical schematic (Table 5.1)

Unit Layout Figure 5.1


Typical Current Code M RGU Layout

Top Hat Assembly for Customer


3-Phase
AC Wire Entry AC Input

AM1 VM1

EA10 CB1 EA4

TB2

TB1 EA3

CT1

F8
SP1 SP3
F14,
F15,
F16 F1 F3
SP2 SP4
F2
F4,
F7
F6 Power Structure
MTR3 (EA1)

CR2 M2 TR1
M1

EA2 PT1
F17
F18
F19

F2
F4

CH1 CH2 CH3

MOUNTED ON ROLL-OUT FRAME

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


5-2 Your Current Code M RGU (Series B)

Electrical Schematic Figure 5.2


Typical Current Code M RGU Schematic
3-Phase
AC Input

CB1

"

CT1
AM1

Ammeter

!
EA3 F14
L1
Line F15
RC L2
Snubber
F16
L3
COMMON

SP4 SP1

SP2
PE
SP3

A
(Go To Next Page)

#
To Power Transformer
Grounding Resistor

TB2-1 TB2-2
115 VAC NRU
Control
Power
VM2 10 12 9 7
Input (115VAC)

Meter Relay

2 4 6

TB1-7
Contact To
Monitoring PE
TB1-8
Circuit

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code M RGU (Series B) 5-3

A
(From Previous Page)
EA10 Control Pow er Filter
F6
C1 CB2 R1
C H1
F4

$ PT1
(X1) (X2)
115 VAC
F8 F7
M TR1 PE
TB 1-9

TB1-10
M TR2,M TR3
Input Line Reactor
Therm osw itch
Optional AUX-CR
R em ote
(Isolation B oard) CR2
TB 1-1 Interlock TB 1-2
CH1 CH2 CH3
1 4
(JM PR)
TB6 TB6
PL2

% Not Faulted

N
L1

D
(See Figure 5.3)
115 VA C R GU
Control Pow er

%
1 15 VA C
Control Bus To Inverter Units

F1 F2 F3

B
CR2
CR2-13 CR 2-14
Pow er Structure (EA1)
(Refer to Figure 5.3) TB1-5 TB1-6

- +
EA4
DC Bus
Suppressor
PE
FOOTNOTES:
EA2 Bus Indicator
+BUS
F1 R1
LED1
" Door-m ounted am m eter option.
-BUS
F2 R2
LED2 PL1
! Line RC suppressor option.
# Ground-fault detection option
$ Control bus option.
& VM 1 % Unit-not-faulted pilot light option.
& DC bus voltm eter option.

DC Horizontal Bus To Inverter Units

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


5-4 Your Current Code M RGU (Series B)

Figure 5.3
Typical RGU Power Structure Schematic

M2
F2 R10, R10A

F3 R11, R11A !
E
F4 R12, R12A
Continued on
Next Page
M1 CH11
CH1
R
CH2
B S
Continued from CH3
Figure 5.2
CT1
T
CT2
F
Continued from F17 Rs CT3
Continued on
Figure 5.2
Next Page
D F18
Ss
Auxiliary
Power Supply
F19 Ts +V
+S
Com
BRIDGE FAN -S
AC -V
L
RTN N
Gnd

BRIDGE THERMAL
PE
SENSOR (NTC) G
TO PE Continued on
GROUND Next Page
TO MAIN CONTROL BOARD J6

J7 P1
J1-20
J1-16
J1-12

J1-1
J1-6
TB5
1 Enable
TB3
" S11 1
BURDEN
2 Fault-Clear RESISTOR
(T)
M1 2
3 External Main
TB2
4 Common 1
BURDEN
RESISTOR
2 (S)
TB6
6
TB1
Bus
8 1
Control
BURDEN
RESISTOR
9 (R)
TR1 2

OFF ON
TR1 M1 M2
SW1
S12
J2

H
TR1 M1 115V AC Continued on
Next Page
1
To Fault
Indication Auxiliary
3

FOOTNOTES:
Circuitry
(page 5-3)
Control
Isolation Board
4
" Fault-clear pushbutton option.
! This phase of the precharge circuit may
not be present in Series A units.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code M RGU (Series B) 5-5

E +

Gate Interface Board

Gate Interface Board

Gate Interface Board


Snubber

Snubber

Snubber
Continued from C
Previous Page
- Continued in
Capacitor Figure 5.2
Bank

F1, F2, F3

Continued from
Previous Page PE
Gate Interface Board

Gate Interface Board

Gate Interface Board


PE PE

TE
TE
TE

G
3 1 TB2
Continued from
Previous Page Power Supply
Filter Board
3 1 TB1

J7 J8 J10

TB7
Gate Drivers
2
1
F1 24V
TE PE
DC-to-DC P13
Convertor
Main Bus
DC-to-DC
Convertor TB4
1
TP3 TP5 TP6 TP4 TP8 TP9
2
Gate Driver Board +24V +15V -15V +5V +12V -12V
PE
J1

J3 J11
Main Control Board LED Indicators
TB1
- Analog In 1 1

+15V -15V +5V Host DSP Enable SCANport R2R OK + Analog In 1 2


Fault Fault OK
Analog In 1 Common 3
- Analog In 2 4
J12

H + Analog In 2 5

Continued from Analog In 2 Common 6


Previous Page Analog Out 1 7
Analog Out 1 Common 8
Analog Out 2 9
SCAN ID1 SCAN ID2 RIO EXT
Analog Out 2 Common 10
J10 J9 J8

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


5-6 Your Current Code M RGU (Series B)

Table 5.1 Current Code M RGU Symbol to Component Cross Reference


AC 3-Phase Input Voltage
Symbol Description Option " 380V AC 460V AC 575V AC
AM1 Ammeter monitoring L1 800A AC
CB1 Circuit breaker 800A, HND
CH1- 3 Input line reactors 137uH 137uH 191uH
CR2 Fault relay 2 NO/ 2 NC
CT1 Current transducer 800:5
CT1, 3 (EA1) Current transducers (on EA1) 3000:1, 0-1000A range
EA1 RGU Power structure
EA2 Bus indicator PCB
EA3 Line RC suppressor PCB
EA4 DC bus suppressor assembly
EA10 Control power filter For 2kHz carrier frequency
F1 (gate drv) Power supply fuse, gate driver PCB 1A, KTK-R
F1 - 2 (EA2) Bus indicator PCB fuses (on EA2) 1A, 1000V, KVR, 1-3/32" diameter, 3" length, 500AIC
F1 - 3 Incoming 3-phase, line fuses 1000A, 170M
F2 - 4 (EA1) Precharge fuses (on EA1) 25A, KLDR 25A, KLDR 30A, KLDR
F4, F6 Primary fuse for a 5 kVA control transformer 25A, KLDR 20A, KLDR 17.5A, KLDR
F7 RGU control power fuse 12A, KLDR
F8 Control bus fuse for a 5 kVA control 25A, KLDR
transformer
F14 - 16 RC suppressor fuses 25A, KTK
F17 - 19 (EA1) AC line sensor fuses (on EA1) 1A, KLDR
M1 Main contactor 600A
M2 Precharge contactor 24A
MTR1 - 2 Door-mounted fan 12", 1200CFM
PL1 DC-Bus-Energized pilot light 24V AC/DC, red, 800MR
PL2 Unit-Not-Faulted pilot light 115V AC, amber, 800MR
PT1 Control power transformer A 5kVA control transformer is standard. This transformer has multiple taps to
accommodate 380, 460, and 575V AC primary voltages.
R10 - 12, Precharge Resistors 6 ohm, 345 W
R10 - 12A
S11 Fault reset pushbutton 1 NO, 800MR
S12 Start switch 1 NO/ 1 NC, 800MR
SP1 - 3 Line-to-line MOVs 460 J, 320V AC 460 J, 320V AC 550 J, 385V AC
SP4 Neutral-to-ground MOV 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC
TB1 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 10 terminals
TB2 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 2 terminals
TR1 Timer Relay 2 NO/ 2 NC (instantaneous), 1NO / 1 NC (on delay)
VM1 DC bus voltmeter 1000V DC
VM2 Ground fault detection 0-440V AC (meter), NO/NC contacts (relay)
" These components are provided with RGU standard options. Not all RGUs will have these components.
If your M-code RGU is equipped with a 4kHz carrier frequency control power filter (EA10), then F4 and F6 will be 17.5 KLDR (380V AC, 5kVA
transformer) or will be 15A KLDR (460V AC, 5k VA transformer). All other fuses remain the same.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 6

Input DC Bus Your Current Code N RGU (Series B)


Rated DC Bus
Voltage Current
(V AC) (A DC)
kW This chapter provides the following information for the current code
380 997 578
N RGU:
460 1000 700
575 914 775 a typical cabinet layout diagram (Figure 6.1)
a typical electrical schematic (Figure 6.2)
a typical RGU power structure schematic (Figure 6.3)
a symbol-to-component reference table for interpreting the
electrical schematic (Table 6.1)

Unit Layout Figure 6.1


Typical Current Code N RGU Layout
CUSTOMER
3-PHASE AC
INPUT

AM1 VM1

TB2

TB1 F14,
CB1 F15, EA4
TB3 EA3
F16

MCP2

SP1 SP3

SP2 SP4
F8

EA10
CT1

F1 F2 F3
F4, F5 Power Structure
F7 CR2 M2
F6 (EA1)

TR1 CR3

EA2

F17
F18
F19

PT1

F2
F4

CH1 CH2 CH3

MOUNTED ON ROLL-OUT FRAME

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


6-2 Your Current Code N RGU (Series B)

Electrical Schematic Figure 6.2


Typical Current Code N RGU Schematic
3-Phase
AC Input

MCP2

A
(To Next Page)

CB1
(TB3-10, 11, 12) B
(To Figure 6.3)
"

CT1
AM1

! Ammeter

EA3 F14
L1
Line F15
RC L2
Snubber
F16
L3
COMMON

SP4 SP1

SP2
PE
SP3

C
(To Next Page)

#
To Power Transformer
Grounding Resistor

TB2-1 TB2-2
115 VAC NRU
Control
Power
VM2 10 12 9 7
Input (115VAC)

Meter Relay

2 4 6

TB1-7
Contact To
Monitoring PE
TB1-8
Circuit

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code N RGU (Series B) 6-3

EA10 C ontrol Pow er Filter

F4
C1 CH2 R1
CH1
A
(From Previous Page) F6

$ PT1
(X1) (X2)
115 VAC
F8 F7 F5
PE
M TR6
TB1-9

M TR4, 5
Input Line Reactor
Therm osw itch M TR1, 2, 3
Optional AUX-CR
R em ote
Interlock CH1 CH2 CH3 (Isolation B oard) CR2
TB 1-1 TB 1-2
1 4
(JM PR)

PL2

N
L1

F
(See Figure 6.3)
115 VA C RGU
Control Pow er
C
(From Previous Page)

%
1 15 VA C
Control Bus To Inverter Units

F1 F2 F3

D
CB1 C B1
Pow er Structure (EA1)
(Refer to Figure 6.3) TB3-10 TB 3-11 TB3-12

E
C R2
CR 2-1 3 CR 2-14

- + TB1-5 TB1-6
EA4
DC Bus Suppressor

FOOTNOTES:
EA2 Bus Indicator
+BUS
F1 R1
LED1
" Door-m ounted am m eter option.
-BUS
F2 R2
LED2 PL1
! Line RC suppressor option.
# Ground-fault detection option
$ Control bus option.
& VM 1 % Unit-not-faulted pilot light option.
& DC bus voltm eter option.

DC Horizontal Bus To Inverter Units

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


6-4 Your Current Code N RGU (Series B)

Figure 6.3
Typical RGU Power Structure Schematic
M2 F2 R10, R10A

B F3 R11, R11A 2
G
Continued from
Figure 6.2 F4 R12, R12A Continued on
Next Page

CH11
CH1
R
CH2
D
S
Continued from
Figure 6.2 CH3 CT1
T CT2
H
F17 Rs CT3
F Continued on
Next Page
Continued from
F18
Figure 6.2 Ss
Auxiliary
Power Supply
F19 Ts +V
+S
Com
BRIDGE FAN -S
AC -V
L
RTN N
Gnd

BRIDGE THERMAL
PE
SENSOR (NTC) I
TO PE Continued on
GROUND Next Page
TO MAIN CONTROL BOARD J6

J7 P1
J1-20
J1-16
J1-12

J1-1
J1-6
TB5
1 Enable TB3
1 S11 1
BURDEN
2 Fault-Clear RESISTOR
(T)
2
CB1
3 External Main
TB2
4 Common 1 BURDEN
RESISTOR
(S)
TB6 2
6
OFF ON TB1
TR1 CR3 M2 Bus
8
Control 1
BURDEN
S12 9 RESISTOR
2 (R)

TR1

SW1
TR1 CR3
J2

115V AC J
Continued on
Next Page
TB3-1 TB3-2 1
UVR To Fault
Indication Auxiliary
3
Circuitry Control
(page 6-3)
CR3
TB3-3
4
Isolation Board
LS TB3-5
M FOOTNOTES:
CR3
TB3-4 TB3-6
1 Fault-clear pushbutton option.
LS 2 This phase of the precharge circuit may
Circuit Breaker (CB1) not be present in Series A units.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Your Current Code N RGU (Series B) 6-5

G
Gate Interface Board
+

Gate Interface Board

Gate Interface Board


Snubber

Snubber

Snubber
Continued from E
Previous Page
- Continued in
Capacitor Figure 6.2
Bank

F1, F2, F3

Continued from
Previous Page
Gate Interface Board

Gate Interface Board

Gate Interface Board


PE
PE PE

TE
TE
I TE

Continued from
Previous Page 2 1 TB2
Power Supply
Filter Board
2 1 TB1

J7 J8 J10

TB7
Gate Drivers
2
1
F1 24V
TE PE
DC-to-DC P13
Convertor
Main Bus
DC-to-DC
Convertor TB4
1
TP3 TP5 TP6 TP4 TP8 TP9
2
Gate Driver Board +24V +15V -15V +5V +12V -12V
PE
J1

J3 J11
Main Control Board LED Indicators TB1
- Analog In 1 1
+15V -15V +5V Host DSP Enable SCANport R2R OK
Fault Fault OK + Analog In 1 2
Analog In 1 Common 3
- Analog In 2 4
J12

J + Analog In 2 5

Continued from Analog In 2 Common 6


Previous Page Analog Out 1 7
Analog Out 1 Common 8
Analog Out 2 9
SCAN ID1 SCAN ID2 RIO EXT
Analog Out 2 Common 10
J10 J9 J8

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


6-6 Your Current Code N RGU (Series B)

Table 6.1 Current Code N RGU Symbol to Component Cross Reference

AC 3-Phase Input Voltage


Symbol Description Option " 380V AC 460V AC 575V AC
AM1 Ammeter monitoring L1 1000A AC
CB1 Circuit breaker 1200A, HND
CH1- 3 Input line reactors 102uH 102uH 144uH
CR2 Fault relay 2 NO/ 2 NC
CR3 Pilot relay 2 NO/ 2 NC
CT1 Current transducer 800:5
CT1, 3 (EA1) Current transducers (on EA1) 3000:1, 0-1000A range
EA1 Power structure
EA2 Bus indicator PCB
EA3 Line RC suppressor PCB
EA4 DC bus suppressor assembly
EA10 Control power filter For 2kHz carrier frequency
F1 (gate drv) Power supply fuse, gate driver PCB 1A, KTK-R
F1 - 2 (EA2) Bus indicator PCB fuses (on EA2) 1A, 1000V, KVR, 1-3/32" diameter, 3" length, 500AIC
F1 - 3 (EA1) DC bus fuses (on EA1) 350A, 700V
F1 - 3 Incoming 3-phase, line fuses 1250A, 170M
F2 - 4 (EA1) Precharge fuses (on EA1) 25A, KLDR 25A, KLDR 30A, KLDR
F4, F6 Primary fuse for a 5 kVA control 25A, KLDR 20A, KLDR 17.5A, KLDR
transformer
Primary fuse for a 10 kVA control 35A, FRS 30A, KLDR 25A, KLDR
transformer
F5 Fan power fuse 10A, KLDR
F7 RGU control power fuse 15A, KLDR
F8 Control bus fuse for a 5 kVA control 50A, FRN
transformer
F14 - 16 RC suppressor fuses 25A, KTK
F17 - 19 (EA1) AC line sensor fuses (on EA1) 1A, KLDR
M2 Precharge contactor 24A
MCP2 Motor circuit protector 30A, HMCP
MTR1 - 3 Door-mounted fan 11", 1100 CFM
MTR4 - 6 Door-mounted fan 7", 340 CFM
PL1 DC-Bus-Energized pilot light 24V AC/DC, red, 800MR
PL2 Unit-Not-Faulted pilot light 115V AC, amber, 800MR
PT1 Control power transformer A 5kVA control transformer is standard, and a 5kVA control transormer is
available as an option. This transformer has multiple taps to accomodate for
380, 460, and 575V AC primary voltages.
R10 - 12, Precharge Resistors 6 ohm, 345W
R10 - 12A
S11 Fault reset pushbutton 1 NO, 800MR
S12 Start switch 1 NO/ 1 NC, 800MR
SP1 - 3 Line-to-line MOVs 460 J, 320V AC 460 J, 320V AC 550 J, 385V AC
SP4 Neutral-to-ground MOV 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC 760 J, 680V AC
TB1 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 10 terminals
TB2 Terminal Block 600V AC/DC, 22-14AWG, 2 terminals
TR1 Timer Relay 2 NO/ 2 NC (instantaneous), 1NO / 1 NC (on delay)
VM1 DC bus voltmeter 1000V DC
VM2 Ground fault detection 0-440V AC (meter), NO/NC contacts (relay)
" These components are provided with RGU standard options. Not all RGUs will have these components.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 7
Installing Your RGU

This chapter provides the following information for the RGU:

the mechanical installation procedures for connecting the RGU to


AC input power
setting up the ground-fault detection option (if supplied)
RGU installation verifications:
absence of short circuits
correct control voltage selection SW1 on isolation board
correct AC input power connections
individual power up verifications
instructions for mechanically connecting your RGU to the lineup
system test procedures

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


7-2 Installing Your RGU

Before You Begin Before you begin, be sure to have the items in the following list and
all items required by referenced procedures:

Documentation
drive system schematics and AC inverter (drive manuals)
this manual
Rockwell Automation publication 2100-5.5.
Rockwell Automation publication 2300-5.1, if using a Bulletin
2300 system
Rockwell Automation publication S-3062, if using FD86N
cabinets

Equipment
the drive system lineup
wire or bus (sized per local electrical codes) to connect AC line
power to your RGU

Tools
a means to punch holes into sheet metal for the routing of conduit
a means to connect AC line power to the drive system
a device for continuity testing

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Installing Your RGU 7-3

Installation Procedure

ATTENTION: To avoid the hazard of electrical shock,

! verify that all voltages on the system bus network have


been discharged before attempting to service the
system.

ATTENTION: Be sure to obey all local electrical


codes when installing your drive system. This
installation procedure provides guidelines that can be
used in the case that codes do not exist.

1. Verify that the RGU has no mechanical damage. If you notice any
damage, refer to the section Drive System Receiving in the
Preface of this manual.
2.

Position and secure the RGU enclosure to the


If your drive system is remainder of the drive lineup according to the
packaged in: installation practices of publications:
Bulletin 2300 or Bulletin 2100-5.5 Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control
2100 enclosures CentersInstructions
2300-5.1 Bulletin 2300 Family of Drive Systems Hardware
Installation Manual
FD86N enclosures 2100-5.5 Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control
CentersInstructions
S-3062 FD86N Enclosure HardwareInstallation Manual

Note: Do not splice the RGUs common DC bus to the lineup at


this time.

3. Verify that the disconnect is open at this time.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


7-4 Installing Your RGU

4. Remove the lifting angle (if present) that is secured to the top of
the RGU.
5. If a top hat assembly is required (M-code RGUs), refer to
publication 2300-5.1 for installation instructions.
6. Cut holes for cable entry using instructions in publication
2300-5.1.
7. Connect the AC input cables to the RGU input according to local
codes. The following table lists the wire sizes that the circuit
breaker, motor circuit protector, or input busbar may
accommodate.

If your RGU current Connect the RGU input terminals to the AC input power
code is: using:
J One connector per phase. The input terminals accommodate
1/0 AWG wiring.
K One connector per phase. The input terminals accommodate
a range of 4/0 to 350kcmil AWG.
L Two connectors per phase. The input terminals accommodate
3/0 AWG wiring.
M Three connectors per phase. The input busbars
accommodate 300kcmil to 500kcmil AWG lugs.
N Four connectors per phase. The input busbars accommodate
350kcmil AWG lugs.

Figure 7.1
Input Connections
J, K, or L-code RGUs
Refer to local wiring codes. (Current
L3
L2 ratings are listed in Appendix B).
L1

M or N-code RGUs 0.250"

0.84"

0.87"

1.750"

L1 L2 L3

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Installing Your RGU 7-5

8.

If your RGU current code is: Torque the RGU input terminals to:
J Values listed on the MCP
K Values listed on the MCP
L Values listed on the MCP
M 45 lb-ft
N 45 lb-ft

9. Set the trip setting of the disconnect according to manufacturers


instructions or per the recommended settings provided in
Appendix C of this manual. Refer to your drive system schematics
for the systems rated current levels.
SW1 10. Verify that the circuit feeding into the isolation board (at TB5 and
TB6) is powered by 115V AC control circuitry. On the isolation
board, set SW1 to 115V AC Control Voltages.
115V AC Control Voltages
Ground-Fault Detection
If the ground-fault detection option has been selected, a meter relay
will be mounted to the door. When wired, the meter will indicate the
ground voltage, and the relay will energize when the ground voltage
exceeds the defined trip voltage.

To set up the ground-fault detection relay, connect terminals TB2-1


and TB2-2 across the power transformer grounding resistor, in
accordance with system schematics and according to transformer
manufacturer specifications (see Figure 7.2). TB1-7 and TB1-8
(normally-closed contacts) can be connected to an appropriate
monitoring device.

Note: The power transformer must have a resistive grounded-


wye secondary with a resistance of 150 ohms.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


7-6 Installing Your RGU

Figure 7.2
Ground-Fault Detection (Wiring)
Pow er Transform er
Grounded-W ye Secondary

Ground-Fault Detection
M eter-Relay Option (VM 2)
TB2
1 1
150 10
2 2
12

TB1

7 7 2
To M onitoring
Device 8 8 4

Note: See the meter relay label for other wiring configurations
(i.e. normally-open contacts).

To calibrate the meter, turn the zero adjuster until the voltage
indicator needle (black) is aligned with the zero mark.

Figure 7.3
Ground-Fault Detection (Meter)
Trip Voltage Needle

Voltage Indicator Needle

Low Set Point Adjuster


High Set Point Adjuster
(Not Used)
(Under Black Cap)

Indicator Indicator
(Device is Powered) (Coil is Energized)

Zero Adjuster

Further setup instructions for the ground-fault detection option will be


given in the power up section of this chapter.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Installing Your RGU 7-7

Terminal Descriptions
Figure 7.4
Main Control Board

1k 1k 10k 10k
AG ND AG ND
10k 10k
4700pf 4700pf

AG ND AG ND
+ - + -
- + - + 10k 10k
.1 .1
T P 27 T P 28

AG ND AG ND
1k 1k 1k 1k .1 .1

AG ND + - AG ND + -

20k 20k A G N D 20k 20k AG ND 560pf 560pf


- + - +

8.25k -15V +15 8.25k


-15V +15
V V
20k 20k 20k 20k
0.047uf 0.047uf 0.047uf 0.047uf
100 100

20k A G N D 20k 20k A G N D 20k


AG ND AG ND 2200pf 2200pf
T P 30 T P 31

10 10 AG ND 10 10 AG ND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TB1
Analog In 1 (-)

Analog In 1 (+)

Analog In 1 (Cmn)

Analog In 2 (Cmn)
Analog In 2 (-)

Analog In 2 (+)

Analog Out 1 (Cmn)

Analog Out 2 (Cmn)


Analog Out 1

Analog Out 2

-10V to -10V to -10V to -10V to


+10V +10V +10V +10V

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


7-8 Installing Your RGU

Figure 7.5
Isolation Board (TB1 and TB3)

TB3
Phase T (LEM ) 1
B urden Resistor
Phase T
Phase T to
control board 2

TB2
Phase S (LEM ) 1
B urden Resistor
Phase S
(M and N-code
Phase S to
2 RGUs only)
control board

TB1
Phase R (LEM ) 1
B urden Resistor
Phase R
Phase R to
control board 2

Terminal
Terminal Block Number Recommended Wiring/Comments
TB1 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 14AWG. 80k differential input resistance. 40k com-
(Main Control Board) 6 mon-mode input resistance.
7, 8, 9, 10 14AWG. Minimum 1k load resistance.
TB1, TB2, TB3 1 and 2 Resistor sizes are listed in the electrical
(Isolation Board) specifications table (in Appendix A).
TB5 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 14AWG. 10mA load at 120V.
(Isolation Board) 9
TB6 1, 2, 3, 4 14AWG. Maximum 1A at 120V.
(Isolation Board)

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Installing Your RGU 7-9

Figure 7.6
Isolation Board (TB5, TB6)

1.0 1.0 1.0


1k 1k 1k
33.2k 33.2k 33.2k
+5V +5V +5V

8.2V 8.2V 8.2


V

3.24k 3.24k
3.24k

1.62k 1.62k
1.62k

2.4 2.4
V V

.15 .15 .15

51 51 51 51 51 51

SW 1 SW 1 S W 1C
A 22k B 22k 22k
22k 22k 22k

TB6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TB5 1 2 3 4
Not Used

Not Used
Auxiliary Control (COM)

External Main

Input Common
Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Enable
Bus Control (NO)

Fault Reset
Bus Control (COM)
Auxiliary Control (NO)

115V A C -N

M a in co nta cto r
T o C o ntro l P o we r C ircuit
F a ult-cle a r pus hbutto n
o ptio n
M a in co nta cto r co ntro l
T o P re cha rge /M a in
T o F a ult C ircuitry
C o nta cto r C o ntro l C ircuitry

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


7-10 Installing Your RGU

Figure 7.7
Typical Communication Connections (Main Control Board)
M ain C ontrol B oard

+1 5V -1 5V +5 V Host DSP Enable SCAN port R2 R OK


Fault Fault OK

J8
J9

R em ote I/O To HIM , GPT, or


C om m unication S C ANport device
Interface B oard J10

(Option 14G1)
To HIM , GPT, or
S C ANport device

Gnd

J13

To Laptop PC
(U sed for upgrading firm w are)

To R em ote I/O
Netw ork

Port Description
J8 SCANport 6 Available for mounting a Remote I/O, DeviceNet, or
RS232/422/483-DH485 communication interface board
J9 SCANport 2 Available for hooking up a HIM, GPT, or SCANport device
J10 SCANport 1 Available for hooking up a HIM, GPT, or SCANport device

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Installing Your RGU 7-11

RGU Installation Verifications

ATTENTION: The verifications described in this

! section must be done before turning power on to the


system. Failure to do so may result in personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: Do not turn on the power if the RGU
fails any of the verifications described in this section.
Doing so may result in personal injury and/or equipment
damage.
ATTENTION: You must correct all problems before
proceeding to the next step. Failure to do so may result
in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

1. Using an ohmmeter or other continuity testing device, verify that


shorts do not exist between:

Source 1 Source 2 Check Below if No Short


L1 L2
L1 L3
L2 L3
L1 PE
L2 PE
L3 PE
R (EA1) PE
S (EA1) PE
T (EA1) PE
DC+ Bus DC- Bus
DC+ Bus PE
DC- Bus PE
DC+ Bus TE
DC- Bus TE
PE TE

2. Verify the AC input connections.


3. If a door-mounted HIM module or SCANport connection has not
been selected, connect a HIM or GPT to the RGUs control board
at this time.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


7-12 Installing Your RGU

Individual Unit Power-Up


Verifications
ATTENTION: Do not proceed if the RGU fails any of

! the checks described in this section. Failure to do so may


result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

ATTENTION: Perform these verifications for each


RGU in your drive system before connecting the
RGU(s) to the drive lineup.

ATTENTION: The RGU supplies power to the DC


bus whenever the disconnect is closed.

ATTENTION: This unit contains stored energy


devices. To avoid the hazard of electrical shock, verify
that all voltage on capacitors has been discharged before
attempting to service, repair, or remove a drive system
or its components.

ATTENTION: The procedures in this manual should


be performed by qualified personnel who are familiar
with solid-state control equipment and with the safety
procedures in publication NFPA 70E.

1. Verify that the RGU start switch is in the off position.


2. Verify that the incoming phase-to-phase line voltages are within
these tolerances (on the line side of the breaker/motor circuit
protector):

Nominal AC Input Voltage Minimum AC Input Voltage Maximum AC Input


(V AC) (V AC) Voltage (V AC)
380 342 418
460 414 506
575 518 632

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Installing Your RGU 7-13

3. Push the disconnect lever to on. Turn the start switch to on. The
DC bus and control circuitry will power up.
4. The common DC bus voltage will vary based upon the 3-phase
AC input voltage. Verify that the common DC bus voltage is
within these tolerances (RGU not modulating):

Nominal AC Input Nominal DC Bus Minimum DC Bus Maximum DC Bus


Voltage (V AC) Voltage (V DC) Voltage (V DC) Voltage (V DC)
380 564 483 591
460 683 585 715
575 848 732 894

Note: The DC bus voltage should be checked at the DC bus


energized board (EA2) as shown in Figure 7.8. Please refer to the
appropriate layout drawings earlier in this manual for board
location.

Figure 7.8
Where to Check the DC Bus Voltage

5. Verify that the voltage across X1 to X2 on the secondary side of


control transformer PT1, if supplied, is within this tolerance:

Nominal AC Control Minimum AC Control Maximum AC Control


Voltage (V AC) Voltage (V AC) Voltage (V AC)
115 104 126

6. Verify that all fans are operational.


7. Verify that the DC Bus Energized pilot light is illuminated.
8. Verify that the Not Faulted pilot light, if supplied, is illuminated.
If it is not illuminated, verify that the contacts of the fault circuit
are closed.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


7-14 Installing Your RGU

9. If the optional ground-fault detection meter relay (VM2) is


supplied, verify that the meter is operating. Set the orange trip
voltage needle 50V higher than the maximum reading of the
black voltage indicator needle (200V maximum).
Note: The black voltage indicator needle should typically read a
low value (between 80 and 100V) when the inverters on the DC
High Set Point Adjuster bus are modulating. This voltage is produced by capacitively-
(Under Black Cap)
coupled currents to ground in the motors cables and windings.

10. Push the disconnect lever to off. Turn the start switch to off. Wait
until all stored energy has dissipated.

Connecting the RGU to the Drive Splicing Busbars


Lineup Splice the RGU DC thru buses in the drive lineup, using the following
publications as applicable:

Publication Enclosures
2300-5.1 Bulletin 2300 Family of Drive Systems Hardware Bulletin 2300 or Bulletin 2100
Installation Manual enclosures
S-3062 FD86N Enclosure HardwareInstallation Manual FD86N enclosures

Testing the System Testing the System (Standalone RGU with Inverters)
For a stand alone RGU connected to inverters, first verify that the
door-mounted start switch is off and that all disconnects in the system
are open.

1. Push the RGU disconnect lever to on.


2. Turn the door-mounted start switch on. The RGU will begin the
precharge operation, charging its internal capacitor bank and the
capacitors in the inverters.
3. When the precharge sequence is finished (about 30 seconds), the
DC bus should be a little under the nominal voltage. At this
point, close the circuit breakers for the inverters and check their
operation.
4. Push the RGU disconnect lever to off. It may take a minute for
the DC bus voltage to go to zero.
5. Open all system circuit breakers.

Test Failures
If the RGU programming parameters are not set up properly, the RGU
may not operate as expected. If you are experiencing difficulty or
abnormal operation, check the parameters given in chapter 8 and test
the system again.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 8
Setting Up Your RGU
This chapter will guide you through the setup procedures necessary
for RGU operation. For parallel applications (2364P units), refer to
publication 2364P-5.01, Parallel ConfigurationUser Manual.

Introduction to the The Human Interface Module (HIM), shown in Figure 8.1, can be
Human Interface Module (HIM) used to program and set up the RGU. The table below shows the
function of the keys.

Figure 8.1
Human Interface Module (HIM)

Choose Mode
Startup

ESC SEL

Escape
ESC Pressing the escape key causes the programming system to go back
one level in the menu tree.
Select
SEL Pressing the select key alternates between the top and bottom lines in
the display.
Increment
Pressing the increment key will increment a displayed value. This key
is also used for scrolling through a lists on the display.
Decrement
Pressing the decrement key will decrement a displayed value. This key
is also used for scrolling through lists on the display.

Enter
Pressing this key causes a parameter entry to be saved to memory.
This key is also used to select items on the display.

The parameters and functions are organized into a menu tree. This
menu tree is broken into seven modes, including Startup, EEProm,
Search, Control Status, Password, Display, and Process (see
Figure 8.2).

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


8-2 Setting Up Your RGU

Figure 8.2
HIM Menu Tree

Display Exam ple


Choose M ode
Choose Mode
Startup

Control
Startup EEProm Search Passw ord Display Process Program
Status

Search for Fault and


Continue or EEProm M odify Param eter List Process Param eter List
Param eters or W arning Q ueues/
Reset Functions Passw ord (Display) Variables (Edit)
Links Reset D rive

Startup Com m unications Diagnostics Voltage Current

M onitor M odule Data SCANport I/O Fault Sel/Stat Fault Sel/Stat DSP Current Ref Voltage Ref
RGU State N om Line Voltage Rem D ata In:P1 Fault Status 1 Line Low Setting D SP D C Bus it Foldback Cur Lim Line Low Setting
Line Voltage Rated A C Current Rem D ata In:P2 Flt R eport M ask 1 Line Hi Setting D SP Ave D C Bus Linear PI O ut Line Hi Setting
Line Voltage Cal Line Inductance Rem D ata In:P3 Fault/W arn M ask1 Bus Low Setting D SP Status Aux Iq Com m and PI Error Lim it
Abs Junct Tem p Utility AC Freq Rem D ata In:P4 Fault Status 2 Bus High Setting CrossCouple Gain Iq M ode Select PI Err Lim Step
Heatsink Tem p Ext Capacitance Rem D ata In:P5 Flt R eport M ask 2 Bus V Tolerance Iq Ref Scaled Iq Pos Lim it PI Err Gain Lim
Iq Fbk O ffset Int Capacitance Rem D ata In:P6 Fault/W arn M ask2 Fault Status 1 Id Ref Scaled Iq N eg Lim it Iq Kp Gain
Iq Feedback M odule Cal Rem D ata O ut:P1 Fault Status 3 Flt Report M ask 1 Ide Current Lim Id Reference Iq Ki Gain
D C Bus Current Line Voltage Rem D ata O ut:P2 Flt R eport M ask 3 Fault/W arn M ask1 Current Loop K i Iq Com m and Iq Integ O utput
Iac Total Line Voltage Cal Rem D ata O ut:P3 Fault/W arn M ask3 Fault Status 2 Current Loop K p Filtered Iq Ref PI Ref Out
Scaled Bus Fbk Iq Fbk O ffset Rem D ata O ut:P4 Fault Status 4 Flt Report M ask 2 N et Id Cm d, D SP Iq Reference A ux Volt Cm d
Bus Volt Cal Iq Feedback Rem D ata O ut:P5 Flt R eport M ask 4 Fault/W arn M ask2 Iqe Fbk DS P N et Iq Pos Lim it Volt M ode S el
+ Bus Volt to Gnd S caled Bus Fbk Rem D ata O ut:P6 Fault/W arn M ask4 Fault Status 3 M onitor N et Iq N eg Lim it M in Bus R ef
- Bus Volt to Gnd Bus Voltage Cal Rem D ata In:A1 Relays Flt Report M ask 3 RGU State Id Reference M ax Bus Ref
Lim its Linear List Rem D ata In:A2 Aux Relay Ind Fault/W arn M ask3 Line Voltage N et Iq Pos Lim it B us RateRef
Rem /Loc S elector [Full Param eter List] Rem D ata In:B1 Aux Relay M ask Fault Status 4 Line Voltage Cal N et Iq N eg Lim it R ef Change Rate
Line Low Setting Rem D ata In:B2 Aux Relay Select Flt Report M ask 4 Abs Junct Tem p Iq Fbk O ffset B us Reference
Line Hi S etting Rem D ata In:C1 Aux Relay Hyst Fault/W arn M ask4 Heatsink Tem p Aux Id Com m and B us Ref Auto
Bus Low S etting Rem D ata In:C2 RGU to RGU Info Iq Fbk O ffset Id Com m and A uto Ref Tracking
Bus High Setting Rem D ata In:D 1 R2R Xm it Addr Softw are Version Iq Feedback Id M ode Select B us Volt Cm d
Bus V Tolerance Rem D ata In:D 2 R2R Xm it, Ind1 Passw ord D C B us Current Id Pos Lim it
Aux Iq Lim it Rem D ata O ut:A1 R2R Xm it, Ind2 Language Sel Iac Total Id N eg Lim it
Iq Pos Lim it Rem D ata O ut:A2 R2R Rcv Addr 1 RGU Catalog # Scaled Bus Fbk Id Feedback
Iq Neg Lim it Rem D ata O ut:B1 R2R Rcv, Ind1 RGU Control M ode Bus Volt Cal Current Autotune
Id Pos Lim it Rem D ata O ut:B2 R2R Rcv, Ind2 Unit Selection + Bus Volt to Gnd D SP B andw idth
Id Neg Lim it Rem D ata O ut:C1 Analog Nom Line Voltage -B us Volt to Gnd D SP D am ping
Autotune Rem D ata O ut:C2 AD C0 Input Rated AC Current Factory Use Only Iq Change Rate
Volt M ode Sel Rem D ata O ut:D 1 AD C1 Input Nom D C Bus Voltage Real Pow er
M in Bus Ref Rem D ata O ut:D 2 D AC1 Output Host Reactive Pow er
M ax Bus Ref SCANport Info D AC2 Output Host Com m and Apparent Pow er
Bus Rate Ref Port Enable M ask D AC1 Indirect Host Status 1 Pow er Factor
Ref Change Rate Enable M ask D AC1 Offset Host Status 2 kW Hours
Bus Reference Clear Fault M ask D AC1 Gain M aster Status kVA Hours
Bus Ref A uto Reset U nit M ask D AC1 Cutoff Freq Host M ode kVA R Hours
Auto RTef Tracking D isable Ow ner D AC2 Indirect 14 Bit A /D Chan2 M W Hours
D SP Bandw idth Enable O w ner D AC2 Offset 14 Bit A /D Chan3 M VA Hours
D SP D am ping Clr Fault O w ner D AC2 Gain 14 Bit A /D Chan4 M VAR Hours
Int Charge Rate Type 1 Status D AC2 Cutoff Freq 14 Bit A /D Chan5 M eter Reset Hour
Sys C harge Rate Type 2 Status Linear List 14 Bit A /D Chan6 M eter Reset M in
Bus Voltage BW [Full Param eter List] 14 Bit A /D Chan7 M eter Reset M on
Bus Volt D am ping 14 Bit A /D Chan8 M eter Reset D ay
Bus Volt Cm d 14 Bit A /D Chan9 M eter Reset Year
Bus Volt In S el Sim ulate
Sim ulator Rate
Sim ulator Load
Sim Charge Rate
Sim Bus Fbk

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Setting Up Your RGU 8-3

Basic Startup Procedure The basic startup procedure must be performed when starting a new
unit to verify the condition of the unit and to configure essential
parameters for operating the unit.

The following items will be needed when starting up the RGU:

a multimeter (for reading voltage and resistance)


a HIM, GPT, or other programming device

ATTENTION: The basic startup must be performed

! when starting a new unit, replacing the main control


board, or upgrading firmware. Improper parameter
settings may result in poor performance or equipment
damage.
ATTENTION: Do not enable the RGU until the basic
startup procedure has been completed.

Starting the RGU


1. Verify that the start switch is turned to off and that the disconnect
lever is pushed to off.
2. Verify that the disconnect levers for all inverters are pushed to off.
3. Visually inspect all wiring in the RGU (board connections, DC
bus terminals, customer connections, etc.).
4. Push the RGU disconnect lever to on and turn the door-mounted
start switch to on. The RGU will power up and perform its
precharge routine.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


8-4 Setting Up Your RGU

Programming the RGU


Using a HIM, GPT, or other programming device, enter the linear
parameter list. The startup procedure below will guide you through
several parameters that need to be configured before operating the
RGU.

Important: The HIM screens shown are only examples. Program


your RGU according to the instructions provided.

Frame Catalog Number [P4] Catalog Number


Enter the frame catalog number of the unit (this should RGU Catalog #
correspond to the catalog number shown on the data CAT 2364FA-MNB SER B 2364F-MNB
CONSTANT TORQUE
name plate of the RGU, located below the main control KVA VOLTS A PH Hz
AC INPUT 541 460 678 3 50/60
board. DC OUTPUT 524 683 749 - DC

ATTENTION: Changing P4 will reinitialize Refer to user manual for


! all parameters in the RGU and will configure installation instructions Drive System s MADE IN U.S.A.

several key parameters to the catalog number


selected.

RGU Control Mode [P5]


Set this parameter to the appropriate setting: RGU Control Mode
Master Mode (0) Use this setting if this is a master unit in a lineup of multiple RGUs. Standalone
Slave Mode (1)Use this setting if this is a slave unit in a lineup of multiple RGUs.
Standalone (2)Use this setting if there are no other RGUs in the lineup (default).
Remote/Local Selector [P8]
Set this parameter to the desired setting (Local Only is default): Rem/Loc Selector
Local Only (0)Use this setting for automatic enabling at startup (HIM/GPT not used for enable). Remote+Local
Remote+Local (1)Use this setting for manually enabling the RGU by a HIM or GPT.
AC Line Reactor Inductance [P12]
Determine the total line inductance (the RGU line reactor inductance plus the transformer leakage Line Inductance
inductance). 165 uH

For line reactor values, refer to the P12 listing in Appendix D. For transformer leakage inductance, use the
following formulas.
Leakage Inductance 2.65 x Iz x Vrms x Vrms Iz Leakage Reactance of Transformer
= (at 60Hz)
of Transformer kVA Vrms Voltage rating (rms) of transformer
kVA Transformer size
Leakage Inductance 3.18 x Iz x Vrms x Vrms
= (at 50Hz)
of Transformer kVA

Example
An RGU (catalog number 2364FA-MNB) is supplied with a Catalog No. TMR001-1 3 Phase 60 Hz
transformer which has the example nameplate shown. 1000 kVA 460 Vrms 5 %Iz

In Appendix A, we find that the catalog number (2364FA-MNB) indicates the unit is a 460V AC M-code RGU.
The line reactors for this unit are rated at 137 uH as indicated in the component chart in Chapter 5.

To determine the transformer leakage inductance, we can use the 60Hz formula with the information from the
data nameplate.
Leakage Inductance 2.65 x 0.05 x 460 x 460
= = 28uH
of Transformer 1000

Add the line reactor inductance to the transformer leakage inductance to determine the value for P12.

P12 = 137uH + 28uH = 165uH (Example only)

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Setting Up Your RGU 8-5

Utility AC Line Frequency [P13]


Set the Utility AC Line Frequency (P13) to the frequency of the AC line. Utilty AC Freq
60 Hz

Measured AC Line Voltage [P14]


Using a meter, measure the AC line voltage. Compare the Measured AC Line Voltage (P14) with the meter Line Voltage
reading. Determine the adjustment that needs to be made in the RGU (by percent). +477 Vrms

AC Line Voltage Calibration [P15]


Set this parameter to adjust the value in P14. If this calibration parameter is changed, check the Measured Line Voltage Cal
AC Line Voltage (P14) again. 0.0%

AC Line Low Setting [P26]


Verify that the AC Line Low Setting (P26) is at an acceptable voltage. Typically, the default setting should be Line Low Setting
sufficient. +432 Vrms

AC Line High Setting [P27]


Verify that the AC Line High Setting (P27) is at an acceptable voltage. Typically, the default setting should be Line Hi Setting
sufficient. +528 Vrms

DC Bus Low Setting [P28]


Verify that the DC Bus Low Setting (P28) is at an acceptable voltage. Typically, the default setting should be Bus Low Setting
sufficient. +500 Volt

DC Bus High Setting [P29]


Verify that the DC High Setting (P29) is at an acceptable voltage. Typically, the default setting should be Bus High Setting
sufficient. +800 Volt

Iq Feedback [P100]
Since all of the inverters are disconnected at this time, this value should be 0.0%. Determine the offset that Iq Feedback
will be required. 0.0%

Iq Feedback Offset [P99]


Set this parameter to adjust the value of P100 to equal 0.0%. If this offset parameter is changed, check the Iq Iq Fbk Offset
Feedback (P100) again. 0.0%

Bus Feedback [P141]


Using a meter, measure the DC bus voltage. Compare the Bus Feedback (P141) with the meter reading. Bus Feedback
Determine the adjustment that needs to be made in the RGU (by percent). +667 Volt

Bus Voltage Feedback Calibration [P144]


Set this parameter to adjust the value in P141. If this calibration parameter is changed, check the Bus Bus Volt Cal
Feedback (P141) again. 0.0%

External Capacitance [P203]


Determine the maximum amount of capacitance that is expected to be on the DC bus at any one time Ext Capacitance
(a table of inverter capacitances can be seen in Appendix B of this manual). 3300 u/10

Important: If additional inverters are added in the future, this parameter must be updated.
Example
An RGU (catalog number 2364FA-MNB) is connected to a 1336 FORCE (100HP), 1336 PLUS (150HP), and
SA3100 (150HP).

In Appendix A, we find that the catalog number (2364FA-MNB) indicates the unit is a 460V AC M-code RGU.
Using the capacitor bank tables in Appendix B (for 460V AC lineups), we have the following values:
1336 FORCE (100HP) 900uf/10
1336 PLUS (150HP) 1200 uf/10
SA3100 (150HP) 1200 uf/10
Total Ext. Capacitance 3300 uf/10 (Example only)

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


8-6 Setting Up Your RGU

SCANport Port Enable Mask [P224]


Verify that the appropriate SCANport ports are active. Note the following bits: Port Enable Mask
SCANport 1 (bit 1) Activates J10 on the main control board (used for HIM, GPT, etc. connection). x1111111
SCANport 2 (bit 2) Activates J9 on the main control board (used for HIM, GPT, etc. connection).
SCANport 6 (bit 6) Activates J8 on the main control board (used for optional SCANport interface board).
SCANport Enable Mask [P225]
This setting determines if the start key on a connected SCANport device can be used to enable the RGU. Enable Mask
Verify that the appropriate bits are set to 1. x1111111
Note: P5 (Remote/Local Selector) and P224 (SCANport Port Enable Mask) must be set accordingly if
a programming terminal/SCANport device will be used to enable the RGU.
SCANport Clear Fault Mask [P226]
This setting determines which SCANport ports (i.e. J8, J9, or J10) can be used to clear faults in the RGU. Clear Fault Mask
Verify that the desired bits are set to 1. P224 (SCANport Port Enable Mask) must be set accordingly. x1111111

SCANport Reset Mask [P227]


This setting determines which SCANport ports (i.e. J8, J9, or J10) can be used to reset the RGU. Verify that Reset Unit Mask
the desired bits are set to 1. P224 (SCANport Port Enable Mask) must be set accordingly. x1111111

Enabling the RGU


After the basic startup procedure has been completed, the RGU can
be enabled. The RGU can be enabled by three different methods.

1. Send an enable command to the Host Command Word by setting


the Enable Cmd bit (P32 bit 1 = 1).
2. If the Remote/Local Selector has been set to Local Only (P8=0),
reset the RGU. The unit will automatically enable after the reset.
3. If the Remote/Local Selector has been set to Remote+Local
(P8=1), press the green start key on a HIM, GPT, or DrivePanel
(DriveTools). Note that P224 and P225 must be configured
appropriately for this.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Setting Up Your RGU 8-7

Advanced Startup Procedure The advanced startup procedure may be performed after the basic
startup has been completed to configure the RGU for optimum
performance. A HIM, GPT, or other programming device will be
required to complete the advanced startup below.

Host Mode [P35]


The bits in the host mode parameter select current limiting functions in the current regulator. Host Mode
x xxx x xx x
Regen OnlyLimits the motoring current to 10% (regenerative current limit remains at 150%). x xxx 100 0

Err LimiterLimits the gain, step, and value allowed in the bus voltage error.
LinearizerAdjusts the current command so the bus voltage corresponds with the line voltage.

Note: The Err Limiter bit should be set to zero if the RGU is connected to any 1336 FORCE or SA3100
drives. Doing so will prevent overvoltage trip problems in the drives.
Id Current Command [P102]
The Id current command determines the amount of reactive current that the RGU should allow. Typically, this Id Command
value should be set to 0.0% (default). 0.0%

For applications requiring reactive current, P102 can be adjusted from 60% lagging to -40% leading power
factor. If a non-zero value is given as the Id current command, the RGU will run at that percentage of reactive
current from the rated AC line current, even if the RGU is unloaded.

Note that reactive current in the RGU takes away from the active, work-producing current (Iq), and reduces
efficiency of the RGU.
Example
If an RGU is set with a -40% leading reactive current (Id), the available active current (Iq) could be determined
in the formula (%Id + %Iq = %Itotal).

%Iq =(100%) - (40%) = 92% (Example Only) [%Itotal=100%]

At full load, the total current would be 100%, but the active (work-producing) current would only be 92%.
Since P102 only determines the amount of reactive current that the RGU will produce (not regarding the load),
the RGU would operate at a power factor of 0 (at no load) and increase to a power factor of -0.92
(at full load).

The reactive current Total Total


remains constant. Current Reactive Current Reactive
Current Current

Active Active
Current Current
Full Load Small Load
Voltage Mode Select [P123]
This parameter determines the voltage command that should be supplied to the regulator. The default, Bus Volt Mode Sel
Ref Auto, selects the value from the Bus Reference Automatic (P129), which is calculated by: Bus Ref Auto

P129 = (Measured AC Line Voltage) x 2 x 1.05 i.e. P129 = 460 x 2 x 1.05 = 683V DC

To maintain the bus at a constant voltage, independent of the AC line voltage, the Aux Volt Cmd or
Bus Volt Cmd may be selected. However, note that the RGU will not operate at 1.0 power factor if the
the specified voltage is less than the peak of the AC line (AC line voltage x 2).

For example, if an RGU is supplied with 460V AC input, but the DC voltage command is set to 640V DC, the
RGU would be forced to operate with a some lagging current, which would reduce the efficiency of the RGU.
In this case, a voltage command greater than 651V DC (460 x 2) would be a better choice.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


8-8 Setting Up Your RGU

Current Loop Bandwidth [P198]


The current loop bandwidth determines the dynamic behavior of the current loop. The current loop becomes DSP Bandwidth
more responsive and is able to track faster as the bandwidth is increased. However, note that system 800 rad/s
limitations and excessive noise may adversely affect the performance of the RGU if the bandwidth is set too
high.

Typically, acceptable bandwidth settings are in the range of 800-1000 rad/s (for J or K-code RGUs) or in the
range of 600-900rad/s (for L, M, or N-code RGUs). A current bandwidth of 800 rad/s is recommended.
Current Loop Damping [P199]
The current loop damping determines the dynamic behavior of the current loop. This damping influences the DSP Damping
amount of overshoot the current loop will exhibit during a transient. Typically, this value should be set to 100 %
100%.
Voltage Loop Bandwidth [P205]
The voltage loop bandwidth determines the dynamic behavior of the voltage loop. The voltage loop becomes Bus Volt BW
more responsive and is able to track faster as the bandwidth is increased. However, note that system 200 rad/s
limitations and excessive noise may adversely affect the performance of the RGU if the bandwidth is set too
high.

If the RGU is supplying a single inverter, a voltage loop bandwidth of 200 rad/s is recommended (300 rad/s
maximum). If the RGU is supplying multiple inverters, the voltage loop bandwidth should be calculated using
the following formula:
200 x P204
P205 =
P203 + P204

Example
An RGU (catalog number 2364FA-MNB) is connected to a 1336 FORCE (100HP), 1336 PLUS (150HP), and
SA3100 (150HP).

The catalog number (2364FA-MNB) indicates the unit is a 460V AC M-code RGU. The internal capacitance
for this unit is 2400 uf/10 (as shown in Appendix D, P204). The total external capacitance for the inverters is
3300 uf/10 (which will become the value for P203). Using the formula, we can determine the appropriate
value for the voltage loop bandwidth (P205):.
200 x 3300
P205 = = 115 rad/s (Example Only)
2400 + 3300

Voltage Loop Damping [P206]


The Voltage Loop Damping (P206) also determines the dynamic behavior of the voltage loop. This damping Bus Volt Damping
influences the amount of overshoot the voltage loop will exhibit during a transient. Typically, this value should 100 %
be set to 100%.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 9
Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation
Parameters
Regulation in the RGU consists of a voltage loop, a current loop, and
the associated scaling commands. As you can see in Figure 9.1,
regulation is a two-part process beginning in the voltage loop and
ending in the current loop.

Figure 9.1
RGU Regulation Block Diagram
RGU Voltage Loop

DC Bus
Reference

Reference to
Iq Current
Feedback PI Regulator
Limiting
Comparator

DC Bus
Feedback

Id Current
Limiting

Offset
Adjustment

Real Time
Commands & Iq & Id PWM
Feedback Scaling Regulation Saturation
Regulator

Signals to
DC to AC
Gate Driver
Transformation
Boards

AC to DC
Transformation

Reference
Angle
Generation

RGU Current Loop

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


9-2 Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters

Voltage Loop Regulation


The voltage loop, which resides in the host processor on the main
control board, performs the initial control calculations. Functionally,
the voltage loop can be considered to be "roughly tuning" the RGU
control. Voltage loop performance is adjusted via user-configured
parameters.

Voltage loop tasks include (Step numbers below correspond to the


functional boxes shown in Figure 9.2):

1. Identifying the DC bus reference


2. Monitoring the DC bus feedback
3. Comparing the DC bus reference with the DC bus feedback
4. Processing bus data and making necessary error corrections in the
PI regulator
5. Generating a voltage loop Iq command

6. Generating a voltage loop Id command

Figure 9.2
Voltage Loop Regulation Block Diagram

1
DC Bus 4
Reference 3 5

Reference to
Iq Current
Feedback PI Regulator
Limiting
Comparator
2
DC Bus
Feedback 6
Id Current
Limiting

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters 9-3

Identifying the DC Bus Reference


The DC bus reference is the DC bus voltage that you program the
RGU to supply.

The user selects the source of the bus reference and the bus reference
value when required. The RGU then performs a minimum-maximum
comparison to ensure that the bus reference value is valid. Next, a
user-configured rate limiter adjusts the bus reference as necessary to
prevent the bus reference from changing too rapidly. Refer to Figure
9.3 for a firmware diagram of these operations.

Figure 9.3
Firmware Diagram for Identifying the DC Bus Reference
127

126 128
3

+ 2 DC Bus
MAX MIN
+ Reference
1 Bus Rate

124 125
0

122 123
SYMBOL KEY
207
X Source; parameter X

Ref Limit X Sink; parameter X


129 Calculator
Y X Parameter X, bit Y

X Battery-backed, parameter X
14 10

130 16 * X Indirect, parameter X

Parameter Number Parameter Name


10 Nominal Line Voltage
14 Measured AC Line Voltage
16 Nominal DC Bus Voltage
122 Auxiliary Voltage Command
123 Voltage Mode Select
124 Minimum Bus Reference
125 Maximum Bus Reference
126 Bus Rate Reference
127 Bus Reference Change Rate
128 Bus Reference
129 Automatic Bus Reference
130 Automatic Bus Reference Tracking
207 Bus Voltage Command

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


9-4 Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters

1. Identify the source of the DC bus reference:

If you want the bus reference to be: Then, set P123 to:
A constant voltage 0
A voltage set by an auxiliary source 1
The sum of a constant value and an auxiliary source 2
Adjusted automatically to follow the line voltage 3

2. Set the constant bus reference value, if required:

If you set P123 to: Then:


0 or 2 Set P207 to the desired DC bus voltage.

3. Set the auxiliary bus reference, if required:

If you set P123 to: Then:


1 or 2 Set P122 to the desired auxiliary bus voltage.

4. Set the parameters for automatic bus referencing, if required:

If you set P123 to: Then:


3 (1) Set P35, bit 0 to 1 for regeneration only.
(2) The RGU will regulate to a bus voltage equal to the
peak of the AC line plus a percentage of the peak,
as defined by P130. Enter a value between -5% and
+10% in P130.
(3) P129 will display the bus voltage that is being
commanded by the automatic bus reference
function.

If the RGU is run in parallel with an NRU, then P35 bit 0 must be set
to 1, and P123 must be set to 3.

5. The RGU compares the DC bus voltage command with both the
minimum (P124) and maximum (P125) bus reference voltages, as
shown in Figure 9.3 to ensure that the DC bus voltage command
value is valid. Refer to P126 for an adjusted DC bus voltage
command that falls within the minimum and maximum limits.
6. Set P127 to the desired rate of bus change. You may select a rate
from 0%/5 ms to 280%/5 ms. P128 contains the resulting DC bus
reference.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters 9-5

Monitoring the DC Bus Feedback


The DC bus feedback is a measurement of the DC bus voltage. Refer
to Figure 9.4 For a firmware diagram that monitors the DC bus
feedback.

Three different feedback references are available. Each reference


provides the same voltage feedback at a different reference point in
the processor. We recommend that you use the default setting (0) for
P139.

The bus feedback is then scaled. When the feedback select (P219) is
set to "0", the bus feedback is applied to the feedback filter. The
feedback filter is configured using P137 and P138. Finally, P141
provides the DC bus feedback.

Figure 9.4
Firmware Diagram for Monitoring the DC Bus Feedback

2 141
38
16
143 140
1
60 1/4 kn
DC Bus
144 256 S + wn
Feedback Feedback
0 Scaling S + wn
61 1/4

139 137

138

SYMBOL KEY
X Source; parameter X

X Sink; parameter X

Y X Parameter X, bit Y

X Battery-backed, parameter X

* X Indirect, parameter X

Parameter Number Parameter Name


16 Nominal DC Voltage
38 Host A/D Converter Input 2
60 DSP DC Bus Voltage
61 DSP Averaged DC Bus Voltage
137 Wn, Bus Feedback Filter Bandwidth
138 Kn, Bus Feedback Filter Gain
139 Voltage Input Select
140 Prefiltered Feedback
141 DC Bus Feedback
143 Scaled Bus Feedback
144 Bus Feedback Calibration

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


9-6 Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters

1. Set P219 to 0 for normal operation (this value cannot be


changed while the unit is running).
2. Select values for Wn (P137) between 0 and 32767 radians/
second, and Kn (P138) between 0 and 1 of the feedback filter.
3. P141 contains the final DC bus feedback value.

Comparing the DC Bus Reference with the DC Bus Feedback


As shown in Figure 9.5, the error signal is the difference between the
DC bus reference (P128) and the DC bus feedback (P141).

Figure 9.5
Firmware Diagram for Comparing the DC Bus Reference with the DC Bus
Feedback

128 142
SYMBOL KEY
+
X Source; parameter X DC Bus Reference Error Signal
-
X Sink; parameter X

Y X Parameter X, bit Y
DC Bus Feedback 141

X Battery-backed, parameter X

* X Indirect, parameter X

Parameter Number Parameter Name


128 Bus Reference
141 Bus Feedback
142 Voltage Loop Error

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters 9-7

Processing Bus Data and Making Necessary Error Corrections in the PI


Regulator
The PI (proportional-integral) regulator is responsible for making the
necessary corrections to reduce the error signal (P142). Refer to
Figure 9.6 for the PI regulator firmware diagram. In addition to
having proportional and integral correction capabilities, the PI
regulator also has the added feature of an error limiter.

The error limiter provides additional correction whenever the error


signal exceeds the maximum error signal allowable (P115). The error
limiter is only functional when the error limiter has been turned on
and the RGU is regenerating.

Once the corrected Iq command has been calculated (P121), the


linearizer can be used to keep the Iq command fairly constant when
the installation is subject to fluctuations in the AC line and DC bus
voltages.

Figure 9.6
Firmware Diagram for Processing Bus Data and Making Necessary Error
Corrections in the PI Regulator

SYMBOL KEY
115 116 117
X Source; parameter X

X Sink; parameter X
1 35
142
Y X Parameter X, bit Y

Error Limiter X Battery-backed, parameter X

118 121 3 35 * X Indirect, parameter X

+
Error kp/8 + Bus Fdbk' Iq Necessary for
Signal Line Voltage' Error Correction
Prop. Gain + Linearizer

119
84

ki/8
S 120
Intg. Gain

Parameter Number Parameter Name Parameter Number Parameter Name


35 bit 1 Host Mode - Error Limiter 119 Voltage Loop Integral Gain
35 bit 3 Host Mode - Linearizer 120 Voltage Loop Inegrator Output
84 Voltage Regulator Output 121 Voltage Loop PI Output
115 Voltage Loop PI Error Limit 140 Bus Prefiltered Feedback
116 Voltage Loop Error Limit Step
117 Voltage Loop Error Gain Limit
118 Voltage Loop Proportional Gain

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


9-8 Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters

1. Verify the proportional gain setting (P118). The value calculated


by the RGU is recommended.
2. Verify the integral gain setting (P119). The value calculated by
the RGU is recommended.
3.

If: Then:
You want to use the error (1) Set P35, bit 1 to "1" to enable the error limiter.
limiter
(2) Set P115 to the maximum error between -100 and -
4V DC that you will allow.
(3) Set P116 to the maximum allowable voltage loop step
of the error limiter.
(4) Set P117 to the proportional gain of the error limiter.

Note: The error limiter functions only when the unit is


regenerating (and P35 bit 1 is set).

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters 9-9

Generating a Voltage Loop Iq Command


The voltage loop Iq command can originate in one of four ways as
determined by user-configurable P90. That resulting Iq command is
then processed through the current limiter to arrive at a voltage loop
Iq command. The current limiter makes adjustments to maintain
minimum and maximum Iq values and acceptable wire temperatures.
Refer to Figure 9.7 for a firmware diagram.

Figure 9.7
Firmware Diagram for Generating a Voltage Loop Iq Command
3
0

2 3 34
89
+ 4 34
1 94
100 ms
+ LPF
95
Iq Necessary for 0
Error Correction
96
90 200 100% = Rated AC Current = 5120

84 Current Limit

98 97

MAX MIN 91
SYMBOL KEY 92
86
1
X Source; parameter X -1 -1 10%
87 0
Max Positive
X Sink; parameter X
2 183
0 35
Y X Parameter X, bit Y "IT"
10 174
1
X Battery-backed, parameter X 174
88
5
0 Max Positive
* X Indirect, parameter X 83

2 35

Parameter Number Parameter Name Parameter Number Parameter Name


34 bit 3 Host Status Word 2 - Iq Positive Limit 95 Filtered Iq Current Reference
34 bit 4 Host Status Word 2 - Iq Negative Limit 96 Iq Current Reference
35 bit 0 Host Mode - Regeneration Only 97 Net Positive Current Limit
35 bit 2 Host Mode - Auxiliary Limit 98 Net Negative Current Limit
83 It Foldback Current Limit 174 bit 5 Host Fault Status Word 1 - Iq Foldback
84 Voltage Regulator Output 174 bit 10 Host Fault Status Word 1 - Heatsink
86 Transistor Junction Temperature Overtemperature
87 Heatsink Temperature 183 bit 2 2t Overload
Host Fault Status Word 4 - I
88 Auxiliary Iq Current Limit 200 Iq Reference Rate Limit
89 Auxiliary Iq Current Command
90 Iq Mode Select
91 Iq Positive Current Limit
92 Iq Negative Current Limit
94 Iq Current Command

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


9-10 Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters

1.

If you want the Iq mode select to be: Then set P90 to:
From the PI regulator (factory default) 0
The sum of the Iq from the PI regulator and an auxiliary Iq 1
An auxiliary Iq 2
Zero 3

2.

If: Then:
You want to use a current (1) Set P35, bit 2 to "1" to enable the auxiliary limit.
limit that is applied to both (2) Set P88 to the desired limit value between 0 and
positive and negative 150%.
currents

3.

If: Then:
You want to set a positive Set P91 to the desired positive current limit between 10
current limit and 150%.

4.

If: Then:
You want to set a negative Set P92 to the desired negative current limit between -150
current limit and -40%.

5. During operation, if the heatsink temperature (P87) or transistor-


junction temperature (P86) becomes too high, the IT function
will impose a current limit. See P83 for the IT-imposed current
limit.
6. The RGU limits the desired Iq command (P94) using the smallest
positive current limit (P97) and the largest negative current limit
(P98). Refer to P96 for the final voltage loop Iq command.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters 9-11

Generating a Voltage Loop Id Command


The voltage loop Id command can originate in one of four ways as
determined by user-configurable P103. That resulting Id command is
then processed through the Id current limiter to arrive at a voltage
loop Id command. The current limiter makes adjustments to maintain
the minimum and maximum Id limit values. Refer to Figure 9.8 for a
firmware diagram.

Figure 9.8
Firmware Diagram for Generating a Voltage Loop Id Command

1
0%
+ 0
3 104

+ 105
0 35
2
101

1
102 93

0
0 ID LIMIT

103

SYMBOL KEY
X Source; parameter X

X Sink; parameter X

Y X Parameter X, bit Y

X Battery-backed, parameter X

* X Indirect, parameter X

Parameter Number Parameter Name


35 bit 0 Host Mode - Regeneration Only
93 Id Reference
101 Auxiliary Id Command
102 Id Current Command
103 Id Mode Select
104 Id Positive Current Limit
105 Id Negative Current Limit

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


9-12 Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters

1.

If you want the Id mode select to be: Then set P103 to:
Zero (factory default) 0
A constant value 1
From an auxiliary Id 2
The sum of a constant value and an auxiliary Id 3
2.

If P103 is set to: Then:


1 or 3 Set P102 to the desired Id current command between -
40% and 60%. A value of zero is default and should be
used for most applications.

3.

If P103 is set to: Then:


2 or 3 Set P101 to the desired auxiliary Id current command
between -40 and 60%.

4.

If P103 is set to: Then:


0 Id parameter (P93) will be zero.

5. Set P105 to the desired negative Id current limit between -40 and
0%.
6. Refer to P93 for the final voltage loop Id command between -60
and 60%.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters 9-13

Current Loop Regulation


The current loop, which resides in the DSP processor, is responsible
for processing the voltage Iq and Id commands and generating the
PWM signals for the IGBTs. The voltage loop is executed every
0.5 ms (2 kHz). The current loop is executed every 0.5 ms (2 kHz) for
L, M, and N-code units, or is executed every 0.25 ms (4 kHz) for
J and K-code units. Refer to Figure 9.9 for a current loop block
diagram.

Figure 9.9
Current Loop Block Diagram

1 2 PWM
Voltage Loop I q and Id Iq & Id
Commands Scaled for DSP Regulation Saturation
Regulator

3 DC to AC Signals to Gate
Transformation Driver Boards

4 AC to DC
Transformation

5
Reference
Angle
Generation

Current loop tasks include (Step numbers below correspond to the


functional boxes shown in Figure 9.9):

1. Iq and Id regulation

2. PWM saturation regulation


3. DC to AC transformation
4. AC to DC transformation
5. reference angle generation

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


9-14 Adjusting Voltage and Current Regulation Parameters

Iq and Id Regulation
Iq and Id perform PI current regulation.

PWM Saturation Regulation


The PWM saturation regulator monitors current distortion and adjusts
power factor compensation as required to maintain commanded bus
voltage and current.

DC to AC Transformation
DC to AC transformation converts DC equivalents into 3-phase AC
values for use in PWM.

AC to DC Transformation
AC to DC transformation converts 3-phase AC values into DC
equivalents for use in calculation.

Reference Angle Generation


The reference angle generator executes a phase-lock loop algorithm
to provide a reference angles that are in phase with those of the utility
3-phase AC line line to neutral voltage.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 10
Interpreting and Setting Status, Command,
and Fault Words
Fault Status Indication The RGU has 4 fault status words. Each fault status word has its own
fault-report-mask word and fault/warning-mask word. The following
table contains a fault status-to-parameter number cross reference:

Fault Status Parameter Fault-Report-Mask Fault/Warning-Mask


Description
Number Parameter Number Parameter Number
Fault Status Word 1 174 175 176
Fault Status Word 2 177 178 179
Fault Status Word 3 180 181 182
Fault Status Word 4 183 184 185

Use the following table to interpret bit settings in fault status and
mask word:

Parameter Type A Bit Set to "0" Means: A Bit Set to "1" Means:
Fault Status Word Not faulted. A fault/warning has occurred.
Fault-Report-Mask - Fault/warning will not be recorded in fault queue or - Fault/warning will be recorded in fault queue or warning
warning queue. queue.
- RGU operation will NOT respond to fault or warning. - If a fault occurs, the hard-fault bit 0 will be set to 1 in
both host status words (Parameters #33 and #34).
- If a warning occurs, the warning-fault bit 1 will be set to
1 in both host status words (Parameters #33 and #34).
Fault/Warning-Mask Item set to cause a warning when corresponding fault- Item set to cause a fault when corresponding fault-report
report bit is set to 1. bit is set to 1.

The items that correspond to each bit in a fault status word/mask are
identified in Table 10.1.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


10-2 Interpreting and Setting Status, Command, and Fault Words

Table 10.1 Descriptions of Fault Status Bits

Fault Status Word 1 (P174-P176) Fault Status Word 2 (P177-P179)


Bit Description Bit Description
0 ROM bad CRC 0 Board-level desaturization
1 RAM error 1 Board-level ground fault detected
2 Battery-backed RAM error 2 Hardware-detected bus overvoltage
3 Error loading DSP software 3 Hardware-detected bus overcurrent
4 Error loading FPGA software 4 Zero sequence errror
5 Iq foldback has occurred 5 Phase-lock loop
6 M1 failure 6 Phase-loss error
7 SCANport error 7 RESERVED
8 RGU-to-RGU hardware error 8 RESERVED
9 Control voltage inadequate 9 RESERVED
10 Heatsink temperature is high 10 Line overcurrent
11 DC bus voltage less than minimum bus limit 11 Current offset
12 DC bus voltage greater than maximum bus limit 12 DSP processor not connecting to host
13 Invalid data in battery-backed RAM 13 RESERVED
14 Bus failed to precharge 14 RESERVED
15 Host processor cannot connect to DSP processor 15 Unknown DSP processor error

Fault Status Word 3 (P180-P182) Fault Status Word 4 (P183-P185)


Bit Description Bit Description
0 Reset due to host clock loss 0 I2t approaching overload
1 Reset due to host double bus fault 1 I2t overload
2 Watchdog reset 2 Heatsink temperature high
3 RGU power-up enabled 3 Reset required
4 Battery low for battery-backed RAM 4 Heatsink sensor open, not connected
5 Primary control clock has been lost 5 Heatsink sensor shorted
6 RGU-to-RGU duplicate address 6 Master RGU has faulted
7 Slave RGU lost communications from Master RGU 7 RESERVED
8 Dual-port RAM error 8 RESERVED
9 DSP clock is no longer synchronized with host clock 9 RESERVED
10 Loss of fast task 10 RESERVED
11 Loss of background task 11 RESERVED
12 Address bus error 12 RESERVED
13 Data bus error 13 RESERVED
14 Line voltage is low 14 RESERVED
15 Line voltage is high 15 RESERVED

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Interpreting and Setting Status, Command, and Fault Words 10-3

Host Processor Information RGU host processor information is made available via command,
status, and mode words as follows:

Word Name Parameter Number Type of Information Provided


Host Processor Command Word 32 RGU command selection, see Table 10.B
Host Processor Status Word 1 33 Present conditions and status of operation.
Host Processor Status Word 2 34 Present conditions and status of operation.
Host Processor Mode Word 35 Specific information on operating modes, see
Table 10.B

Use the following table to interpret bit settings:

Parameter Type A Bit Set to 0 Means: A Bit Set to 1 Means:


Command Word Specific command is not executed. Specific command is executed.
Status Word Condition is false. Condition is true.
Mode Word Mode is disabled. Mode is enabled.

The items that correspond to each bit are identified in Table 10.2.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


10-4 Interpreting and Setting Status, Command, and Fault Words

Table 10.2 Descriptions of Bits

Host Processor Command Word (P32) Host Processor Mode Word (P35)
Bit Description Bit Description
0 Clear faults 0 Operate in regenerative mode only
1 Enable the RGU 1 Error limitor is enabled
2 Reset watt-hour meter 2 Auxiliary limit is used for current limit
3 Save parameters 3 Linearizer enabled
4 Recall parameters 4 RESERVED
5 Initialize parameters using defaults 5 RESERVED
6 Clear warnings 6 RESERVED
7 Reset RGU 7 RESERVED
8 Clear Fault Que 8 RESERVED
9 Clear Warning Que 9 RESERVED
10 Disable RGU 10 RESERVED
11 Reset the RGU 11 RESERVED
12 RESERVED 12 RESERVED
13 RESERVED 13 RESERVED
14 RESERVED 14 RESERVED
15 RESERVED 15 RESERVED

Host Processor Status Word 1 (P33) Host Processor Status Word 2 (P34)
Bit Description Bit Description
0 Hard fault has occurred 0 Hard fault has occurred
1 Warning fault has occurred 1 Warning fault has occurred
2 Clear fault(s) request pending 2 Power factor is lagging
3 Clear warning(s) request pending 3 Iq is negative limited
4 Bus control relay closed 4 Iq is negative limited
5 Bus is at half of its rated voltage 5 External clear fault required
6 Bus is at rated voltage 6 Regenerating current
7 RGU enabled 7 External enable activated
8 DSP processor is ready 8 M1 feedback (1=closed)
9 Bus control is ready 9 DC bus at voltage
10 RESERVED 10 Wire overtemperature (I2t) monitoring is active
11 RESERVED 11 Wire overtemperature (I2t) warning
12 RESERVED
12 RESERVED
13 DC bus precharge complete
13 RESERVED
14 RGU control is ready
14 RESERVED
15 DC bus is under RGU control
15 DC bus is under RGU control

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Interpreting and Setting Status, Command, and Fault Words 10-5

DSP Processor Information RGU DSP processor information is made available via one command
and one status word as follows:

Word Name Parameter Number Type of Information Provided


DSP Processor Status Word 62 Present operational state of DSP.
DSP Processor Command Word 63 Host and system states for DSP usage.

Use the following table to interpret bit settings:

Parameter Type A Bit Set to 0 Means: A Bit Set to 1 Means:


Command Word State is inactive. State is active.
Status Word Condition is false. Condition is true.

The items that correspond to each bit are identified in Table 10.3.

Table 10.3 Descriptions of Bits

DSP Processor Status Word (P62) DSP Processor Command Word (P63)
Bit Description Bit Description
0 RESERVED 0 Host reset
1 RESERVED 1 Host enabled
2 RESERVED 2 Host run
3 RESERVED 3 Host faulted
4 RESERVED 4 Bench test PWM
5 RESERVED 5 Bench test sinusoid
6 RESERVED 6 External main contactor is closed (TRUE)
7 RESERVED 7 Current offset is enabled
8 DSP is Ready 8 RESERVED
9 DSP is Running 9 RESERVED
10 DSP is Faulted 10 RESERVED
11 RESERVED 11 RESERVED
12 RESERVED 12 RESERVED
13 RESERVED 13 RESERVED
14 RESERVED 14 RESERVED
15 RESERVED 15 RESERVED

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


10-6 Interpreting and Setting Status, Command, and Fault Words

This page intentionally left blank.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 11
Configuring Analog Input and Output
Parameters
Analog Inputs The RGU has two 14-bit, analog-to-digital convertors (A/D) rated to
receive user-configured analog inputs in the range of +/-10V DC.
The two A/Ds are labeled ADC0 and ADC1.

The A/Ds are not programmed and will clip voltage inputs that
exceed +10V or are less than -10V. When converted to digital values,
the A/D will output values in the range of +/-8192. A +10V input
equates to +8192, -10V to -8192.

The following A/D parameter contains the quantized equivalent of the


voltage applied at the analog input:

Description ADC0 Parameter Number ADC1 Parameter Number


Value after A/D conversion 36 37

The analog input is accessible via terminal block 1 (TB1) on the main
control board as follows:

ADC Name Input Terminal Designator


(+) TB1-2
ADC0 (-) TB1-1
(+) TB1-5
ADC1 (-) TB1-4

A/D Value Parameters Use this parameter to view the quantized value of the voltage applied
at the analog inputs.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


11-2 Configuring Analog Input and Output Parameters

Analog Outputs The RGU has two 12-bit, digital-to-analog convertors (DAC) rated to
provide analog outputs in the range of +/- 10V DC. The two DACs
are labeled DAC1 and DAC2.

Each DAC is programmed using 4 parameters that identify the value


to be sent to the analog output and specify how that value needs to be
scaled prior to digital-to-analog (D/A) conversion. Refer to Figure
11.1 for a block diagram. These parameters are as follows:

Description DAC1 Parameter Number DAC2 Parameter Number


Source (Indirect) 49 53
Offset 50 54
Gain 51 55
Cutoff frequency for the 52 56
internal low-pass filter

The following DAC parameter allows you to view the scaled value
prior to D/A conversion:

Description DAC1 Parameter Number DAC2 Parameter Number


Scaled value prior to D/A 47 48
conversion

The analog output is accessible via terminal block 1 (TB1) on the


main control board as follows:

DAC Name Output Terminal Designator


(+) TB1-7
DAC1 (-) TB1-8
(+) TB1-9
DAC2 (-) TB1-10

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Configuring Analog Input and Output Parameters 11-3

Figure 11.1
Scaling Process for Analog Outputs

Offset Value Filter Cutoff Frequency

+ Output
+ Gain Value Low Pass Value 12-Bit Analog
Source Value 256 Filter DAC Output

DAC Source Parameters Use this parameter to specify the parameter number of the value that
you want sent to the analog output.

For example:

If you want to output P143 (Scaled Bus Feedback), enter 143


in the Source Parameter (P49 or P53).

DAC Offset Parameters Use this parameter to add or subtract an offset from the source value.
An offset is arithmetically added to the source value.

To determine the relationship between the offset value and the source
value, do the following:

1. Verify that P6 (Unit Selection) is set to display engineering units.


2. Identify the maximum and minimum values of the source value.
3. Looking at the maximum and minimum source values, determine
the desired amount of offset and convert that amount to the
nearest integer.
4. Enter that integer value as your offset.
Important: The offset value is not scaled in relation to the source
value units; the offset value is directly added to the source value. The
large range of acceptable offset values is intended to provide
flexibility.

Note: When specifying an offset value, verify that the offset value
is of a desired magnitude when compared to DAC source
parameter.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


11-4 Configuring Analog Input and Output Parameters

DAC Gain Parameters Use this parameter to specify the gain of the value that you want sent
to the analog output. To determine a gain value, do the following:

1. Verify that P6 (Unit Selection) is set to display engineering units.


2. Identify the maximum and minimum values of the source value.
3. Add the offset value to both the maximum and minimum source
values.
4. Select the largest absolute source value as the maximum DAC
output.
5. Select a gain so that the maximum DAC output will not exceed
+/- 2048.
Important: A gain value of 0 will result in an analog output value of
0V.

Important: If you select a gain value that permits the DAC output to
exceed +/- 2048, the analog output value will cutoff to +10V DC for
DAC outputs greater than +2048, and to -10V DC for DAC outputs
less than -2048.

DAC Cutoff Frequency Parameters Use this parameter to specify a cutoff frequency for the low pass
filter.

Note: A cutoff frequency of zero deactivates the filter.

DAC Output Parameters Use this parameter to view the scaled source value that is being
converted and applied to the analog output.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Configuring Analog Input and Output Parameters 11-5

Analog Output Example


Example:
In a unit with a 460V AC input, send the Scaled Bus Feedback (P143)
out through Analog Out 1. The analog output will be between 0 and
+10V.

143 Scaled Bus Feedback


[Scaled Bus Fbk]

This parameter shows the calibrated bus


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
feedback. The value of this parameter is used to Factory Default 0
determine the Bus Feedback (P141) and is used Minimum Value 0
to calculate the DC Bus Current (P107). Maximum Value 1.5 x P16
Related Parameters P38, P60, P61, P144

Note: The maximum value of P143 for this example would be


1050V (1.5 x 700 = 1050).

The DAC1 Indirect (P49) will be used to select which parameter


should be processed through DAC1 (out TB1-7 and TB1-8).

The DAC 1 Offset (P50) will be used to determine how the parameter
information will be adjusted (+/-) before being sent to Analog Out 1.

The DAC1 Gain (P51) will be used to adjust the magnitude of the
signal being sent to Analog Out 1.

The DAC1 Cutoff Frequency (P52) will be used to adjust the


frequency of the output to Analog Out 1.

The DAC1 Output (P47) will be used to view the output being sent to
Analog Out 1. The value 2047 corresponds to a +10V AC output
being sent to Analog Out 1, and the value -2048 corresponds to a
-10V AC output being sent to Analog Out 1.

P49 P50 P51 P52 P47

DAC1 DAC1 DAC1 DAC1 DAC1 Analog Out 1


Indirect Offset Gain Cutoff Freq Output

points to value in +/- adjustment to multiplier to value adjusts the sends the
P143 value in P143 in P143 frequency resulting value to
Analog Out 1.

P143

Scaled Bus
Feedback

The following steps could be taken to send the Scaled Bus Feedback
out through Analog Out 1 (TB1-7 and TB1-8) with an output of 0 to
+10V.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


11-6 Configuring Analog Input and Output Parameters

1. Select P49 (DAC1 Indirect) and enter 143.


P49 will allocate P143 as the source of output for Analog Out 1.

2. Select P50 (DAC1 Offset) and enter 0, then select P51 (DAC1
Gain) and enter 0.33.
The range of our source parameter (P143) needs to correspond with
the desired range of the DAC1 Output (P47). To do this, we set the
gain and offset.

Possible range of P143: 0-1050 (volts) / 0-6144 (internal units)


Desired range of DAC1 Output: 0-2047 (which corresponds to 0-10V)

It is the internal units of P143 are sent to the DAC1 Output. Here is
how we can calculate the maximum internal units of P143.

Max User Units 4096 1050 4096


Max Internal Units = --------------------------------------------------- = ----------------------------- = 6144
P16 700
P16 = 700 in a unit
Formula for P143 Internal Units with a 460V AC input

The offset and gain needed to adjust P143 (0-6144) to the range of
P47 (0-2047) can be calculated as shown below.

(P143 + Offset) x Gain = P47

(0 + Offset) x Gain = 0 (Min)


(6144 + Offset) x Gain = 2047 (Max)

The minimums are both zero, so for this example, we can set the
offset to 0, and can just determine what multiplier (gain) would be
needed.

6144 x Gain = 2047


Gain = 0.333

Setting P50 (DAC1 Offset) to 0 and setting P51 (DAC1 Gain) to 0.33
will result in a range of 0-2047 being sent to the P47 (DAC1 Output),
which is what we want.

3. Select P52 (DAC1 Cutoff Frequency) and enter 0.5. Since this is
monitoring a DC value, the filter can be set to a low value.
4. Select P47 (DAC1 Output) to view the values being sent to the
D/A converter. The values in P47 (0 to 2047) should correspond
to the magnitude of the output (0 to +10V).

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Chapter 12
Setting Up Trending
Trending is a diagnostic tool that you can use to capture and retain an
input parameter data value until a trigger condition occurs. The RGU
has the capacity to setup and monitor up to 4 parameters, Trend 1
through Trend 4. With trending, you program the:

parameter to sample
trigger condition
sampling rate
quantity of samples to be taken after the trigger occurs
whether trending is to occur one time or continuously
Parameters used by trending are shown in the table below.

Table 12.1 Trending Parameters

Trend 1 Parameter Trend 2 Parameter Trend 3 Parameter Trend 4 Parameter


Description
Number Number Number Number
source 293 305 317 329
variable X source 294 306 318 330
variable X constant value 295 307 319 331
variable Y source 296 308 320 332
variable Y constant value 297 309 321 333
operator (comparison type) 298 310 322 334
sampling rate 299 311 323 335
quantity of post-trigger samples 300 312 324 336
mode (one-shot or continuous operation) 301 313 325 337
select 302 314 326 338
status 303 315 327 339
output 304 316 328 340

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


12-2 Setting Up Trending

Selecting the Parameter to Sample 1. Identify the number of the parameter that you want to sample.
2.

If you are programming Then enter the number of the parameter to be


Trend: sampled in:
1 P293
2 P305
3 P317
4 P329

Setting the Trigger Condition The trigger condition defines the event that must be true before the
trend is triggered (activated). After the trend is activated and the
required number of post samples have been recorded, the last 500
samples for that trend are made accessible via the output parameter.

The following statement determines the trigger point:

[Variable X] [Operator] [Variable Y]

Variable X is compared to Variable Y. If the condition specified by


the Operator is true, then the trend is triggered. Typically, you link
one variable to a parameter and the other variable to either a
parameter or a constant value.

Important: You should make sure that you are comparing either both
signed parameters or both unsigned parameters. Trying to compare a
signed parameter to an unsigned parameter could cause unexpected
results.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Setting Up Trending 12-3

To set the trigger condition:

1.

If you want variable X to be a: Then:


Parameter value Identify the parameter number of that parameter.
Constant value Select a desired constant value in the range of +32767
to -32768.

2.

If you have identified a parameter


Then enter the number of the parameter to be
number for variable X and are
sampled in:
programming Trend:
1 P294
2 P306
3 P318
4 P330

3.

If you have selected a constant


value for variable X and are Then:
programming Trend
1 1. Set P294 to"0".
2. Enter the desired constant value
in P295.
2 1. Set P306 to"0".
2. Enter the desired constant value
in P307.
3 1. Set P318 to"0".
2. Enter the desired constant value
in P319.
4 1. Set P330 to"0".
2. Enter the desired constant value
in P331.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


12-4 Setting Up Trending

4.

If you want variable Y to be a: Then:


Parameter value Identify the parameter number of that parameter.
Constant value Select a desired constant value in the range of +32767
to -32768.

5.

If you have identified a parameter


Then enter the number of the parameter to be
number for variable Y and are
sampled in:
programming Trend:
1 P296
2 P308
3 P320
4 P332

6.

If you have selected a constant


value for variable Y and are Then:
programming Trend
1 1. Set P296 to"0".
2. Enter the desired constant value in P297.
2 1. Set P308 to"0".
2. Enter the desired constant value in P309.
3 1. Set P320 to"0".
2. Enter the desired constant value in P321.
4 1. Set P332 to"0".
2. Enter the desired constant value in P333.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Setting Up Trending 12-5

7. Select the number that corresponds to the desired operator using


the table below:

Number This Operator: Compares:


0 GT (Greater Than) Data values for X and Y.
1 LT (Less Than) Data values for X and Y.
2 EQ (EQual) Data values for X and Y.
3 NE (Not Equal) Data values for X and Y.
4 AND 16-bit word in X to a 16-bit mask in Y.
5 NAND (Negated AND) 16-bit word in X to a 16-bit mask in Y.
6 OR 16-bit word in X to a 16-bit mask in Y.
7 NOR (Negated OR) 16-bit word in X to a 16-bit mask in Y.

Important: Remember that the trigger condition is compared in the


following manner [Variable X] [Operator] [Variable Y].

8.

If you are programming


Then enter the operator in:
Trend:
1 P298
2 P310
3 P322
4 P334

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


12-6 Setting Up Trending

Setting the Sampling Rate You can specify how often you want the RGU to take data samples.
Data samples may be taken 2 milliseconds apart to 30 seconds apart.

Note: The trigger condition is evaluated:

at the rate of sampling whenever the sampling rate is less than 20


milliseconds
at 20 milliseconds whenever the sampling rate exceeds 20
milliseconds.
1. Select a sampling rate between 0 and 30 seconds.
2.

If you are programming Trend: Then enter the sample rate in:
1 P299
2 P311
3 P323
4 P335

Note: The RGU will round the desired sample rate to the nearest
2-millisecond interval.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Setting Up Trending 12-7

Setting the Number of Post You also need to specify the number of data samples to be taken once
Samples a trigger condition occurs. You can specify that 0 to 499 post samples
be taken. One sample is reserved for the instance when the trigger
condition becomes true.

Note: Pre-samples are samples taken prior to the trigger


condition becoming true.

Important: Typically, when a trend buffer is set to trigger on a fault,


you would set the post sample quantity to a lower value, such as 20.
This allows you to evaluate the trended parameters data from before
the trigger.

When a trend buffer is set up as a level detector, the post sample value
is generally set to a higher value. This allows you to evaluate what
happened after the trigger occurred.

1. Determine the number of samples to be taken after the trigger


point becomes true.
2.

If you are programming


Then enter the post trigger samples in:
Trend:
1 P300
2 P312
3 P324
4 P336

Important: If the trigger condition occurs before the pre-


samples can be taken, the pre-samples may be
unreliable. The pre-samples are valid only if the
trigger does not occur before the pre-sample time
has elapsed. You can use the following equation to
determine pre-sample time:
T1 = (500 S2 1) x RS
T1 pre-sample time
S2 the number of post samples
RS the sample rate

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


12-8 Setting Up Trending

Setting the Trend Mode and 1.


Selection
If you want the trend to be: Select the following value for the Trend Mode:
Continuous 1
One shot 0

2.

If you are programming Trend: Then enter the mode value in:
1 P301
2 P313
3 P325
4 P337

3.

If you want the trend to be: Select the following value for the trend selection:
Disabled 0
Enabled 1
Forced to Trigger 2

4.

If you are programming Trend: Then enter the mode value in:
1 P302
2 P314
3 P326
4 P338

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Setting Up Trending 12-9

Trending Status The trending operation has five associated states (refer to Figure 12.1
for an illustration of the trending operation cycle.):

Number This Operator: Compares:


0 Unprogrammed Trending is not operational.
1 Stopped No data samples are being taken and output
contains the data samples that have been taken for
the previous trending.
2 Running The trigger condition has not been reached and data
samples are being taken at the specified rate.
Output contains the data samples from the previous
trend.
3 Triggered The trigger condition has occured and the post
samples are being taken.
4 Forced Triggered The trigger condition was forced so that the post
samples could be taken.

Figure 12.1
Trending Operation Cycle

Forced Trigger

Last post sample gathered Trend Select


and in one shot mode set to 2.

Last post sample


gathered and in
continuous mode

Stopped Trend Enabled Running

Last post sample


gathered and in
continuous mode
Last post sample
gathered and in one Programmed trigger
shot mode condition is true

Triggered

1.

For the status of Trend: See:


1 P303
2 P315
3 P327
4 P339

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


12-10 Setting Up Trending

Looking at the Output When the trend output is linked to the analog output and a chart
recorder is then connected to the analog output, you can view the
trend output. To locate the starting point of a trend, look for a
negative spike followed by a positive spike. These spikes are added to
indicate the oldest piece of sampled data.

If you want to look at the current data, you can read the real time
trend sample data using:

the DriveTrending portion of the DriveTools software


a GPT

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Appendix A
RGU Catalog Numbers
This appendix provides a description of RGU catalog numbers. For
spare part kit information, see publication 2364-6.0.

Understanding Catalog Numbers Catalog numbers consist of various components that make up a 2364
unit. Each character of the catalog number helps identify a specific
RGU. The first four numbers represent the family of products (for
example, 2364). The remaining characters define a specific version
or option.

Determining Catalog Numbers


To help you to understand, we will provide an example of how to
determine a catalog number for a 2364 RGU unit.

The beginning portion of the catalog number for all 2364 RGU units
is 2364F (F is for the regenerative, DC bus supply unit). The
remaining portion of the catalog number will represent the options for
which you need to make a selection.

The options must appear in this order:

2364 F Wiring type - Current Enclosure AC input line - XX Trip device - Options
rating voltage type

For example, if you were to use the table on the following page to
select an RGU that:

supplies 743A DC output


inputs 460V AC
has a NEMA Type 1 enclosure without gaskets and door fan
filters
includes the option:
Analog DC Bus Voltmeter
The catalog number would be: 2364FA-MAB-XXCM-715P

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


A-2 RGU Catalog Numbers

RGU Catalog Numbers

B ulletin Unit W iring Current A C Input Line


N um ber Type Type R ating Enclosure Voltage" Options !

2364 F A

F = RGU
A = A type

DC Bus Current for:


380/460V AC Inputs 575V AC Inputs
J= 85A DC 71A DC
K= 200A DC 202A DC
L= 364A DC 326A DC
M= 752A DC 672A DC
N= 1000A DC 914A DC

A = NEM A Type 1 w ithout gaskets and door fan filters


J = NEM A Type 1 w ith gaskets and door fan filters
N = Pow er Structure -- no enclosures, no options #
N = 380V AC
B = 460V AC
C = 575V AC

Control Pow er Source $ 6P = Standard capacity control transform er for control bus

Door-M ounted Pilot Lights 4EA = Unit-Not-Faulted / Control Bus Pow er On Pilot Light

Door-M ounted Pushbutton 1R = Unit Reset

M etering 710P = Analog AC input am m eter (L1 Phase only)


715P = Analog DC bus voltage m eter

Protection 14LSP = Line RC suppressor m odule %


88GF = Ground-fault detection &

Com m unication Options ( 14G1 = Rem ote I/O com m unication interface board
14G2 = RS232/422/483 (using DF1 protocol) and DH485 com m unication interface board
14G5 = DeviceNet com m unication interface board

Unit Door Nam eplates M 3EW = W hite background w ith black lettering; phenolic label
N3EB = Black background w ith w hite lettering; phenolic label
N3ER = Red background w ith w hite lettering; phenolic label

Hum an Interface M odule ) 14HAPC = Door-m ounted HIM (program m er only)


14HNBC = Door-m ounted SCANport connector (HIM cradle & internal connection cable only)

M iscellaneous 14W LBL = Brady Datab w ire labels *


J12 = 115V DC, 15A duplex receptacle +
J11 = Audio phone jack

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


RGU Catalog Numbers A-3

Footnotes:
" System utilization voltages.

! M ultiple option num bers m ust be separated by a dash and added to the base catalog num ber.

# IGBT m odule assem bly is available for use as a spare part; do not include HP code, trip device, or options in the catalog
string. IGBT m odule assem bly includes IGBT m odules, snubbers, free-w heeling diodes, m odule fan, precharge
resistors, gate driver boards, m ain control board, and isolation board. Exam ple: 2364FA-KNB

$ Each RG U includes a basic capacity control transform er that supplies the RGU w ith control pow er. The control pow er
source option allow s you to select a higher capacity control transform er for control bus applications. Control pow er
source option includes a control bus fuse and control bus.

% The line RC suppressor is recom m ended for installations w here the prim ary of the distribution transform er is 2300V AC
or greater.

& Pow er transform er m ust have a resistive, grounded-w ye secondary w here the resistance is 150 ohm s.

( The RGU can accom m odate up to 1 of the follow ing options: 14G1, 14G 2, or 14G5.

) Hum an Interface M odule options perm it HIM or GPT connection through a closed unit door. Only one Hum an Interface
M odule option can be selected.

* Units com e standard w ith cloth w ire labels. D atab labels offer the added protection of a clear plastic cover on top of the
labels.

+ Custom er supplies 115V AC control pow er and w iring to the duplex receptacle.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


A-4 RGU Catalog Numbers

Bulletin 2364F RGU Spare Part Kits Spare part kit information for all 2364 products can be found in
publication 2364-6.0.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Appendix B
Specifications

Functional Specifications Table B.1 Functional Specifications


Efficiency 97%
AC Input Frequency Tolerance 45 to 65 Hz
AC Input Voltage Tolerance 10%
Motoring Output Current Overload 150% of rated current for 60 seconds
Regenerating Output Current Overload 150% of rated current for 60 seconds

150% of rated current for 30 seconds


(380/460V AC N-code RGUs at 40C,
or 575V AC N-code RGUs at 30C)
Output Voltage Variation 10% maximum for a 100% DC output current step
load change
Resolution of Output Voltage Selection 1.0V
Voltage Regulator Bandwidth 200 radians/sec maximum
Current Regulator Bandwidth 800 radians/sec (for 2 kHz units)
1200 radians/sec (for 4 kHz units)

Table B.2 Operating Sound Level

RGU Current Code Average Operating Sound Level (dB) "


J 75
K 77
L 84
M 82
N 85
" Sound level determined using "A"-type weighting.

ATTENTION: Appropriate hearing protection must

! be used in accordance with your company standards and


local ordinances. (OSHA dictates effective hearing
protection is to be administered when employees are
exposed to noise equal to or greater than an 8-hour
time-weighted average sound level of 85 decibels.)

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


B-2 Specifications

Electrical Specifications Table B.3 Electrical Specifications I

Nominal " Continuous Maximum Control Transformer Ratings


RGU Input Nominal DC
Input AC Line Continuous DC !Rated DC Basic Standard
Current Power Bus Voltage
Voltage Current Bus Current Bus (kW) Capacity Capacity
Code (kVA) (V DC)
(V AC) (A AC) (A DC) (kVA) (kVA)

J 380 77 51 564 85 49 2.0 5.0


K 380 182 120 564 200 116 2.0 5.0
L 380 330 217 564 363 211 2.0 5.0
M 380 678 447 564 746 433 5.0 5.0
N 380 906 596 564 997 578 5.0 10.0

J 460 77 61 683 85 59 2.0 5.0


K 460 182 145 683 201 141 2.0 5.0
L 460 330 263 683 364 255 2.0 5.0
M 460 678 541 683 749 524 5.0 5.0
N 460 906 722 683 1000 700 5.0 10.0

J 575 77 62 848 88 74 2.0 5.0


K 575 182 181 848 201 170 2.0 5.0
L 575 286 285 848 326 276 2.0 5.0
M 575 602 600 848 686 582 5.0 5.0
N 575 802 799 848 914 775 5.0 10.0
" The continuous AC line current values apply to both motoring and regenerating operations.
! Rated DC bus kW is the power available on the DC thru bus at rated voltage and current.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Specifications B-3

Table B.4 Electrical Specifications II

Overvoltage
RGU Input Internal Line Overcurrent Overcurrent Overvoltage Burden Warning Trip
Trip
Current Voltage Capacitance Inductance Trip Trip Reference Trip Resistor Temperature Temperature
Reference
Code (V AC) (uF) (uH) (Arms) (TP20 Volts) (V DC) (Ohms) (C) (C)
(TP22 Volts)

J 380 6450 1193 173 4.55 820 3.75 8.87 80 100


K 380 12000 510 409 4.55 820 3.75 7.50 80 100
L 380 15000 317 743 4.55 820 3.75 6.19 80 100
M 380 24000 137 1526 4.55 820 3.75 4.02 80 110
N 380 24000 102 2039 4.55 820 3.75 3.01 80 110

J 460 6450 1193 173 4.55 820 3.75 8.87 80 100


K 460 12000 510 409 4.55 820 3.75 7.50 80 100
L 460 15000 317 743 4.55 820 3.75 6.19 80 100
M 460 24000 137 1526 4.55 820 3.75 4.02 80 110
N 460 24000 102 2039 4.55 820 3.75 3.01 80 110

J 575 2860 1853 140 4.55 1025 4.69 11.0 80 100


K 575 6000 832 409 4.55 1025 4.69 7.50 80 100
L 575 15000 404 644 4.55 1025 4.69 7.15 80 100
M 575 24000 191 1354 4.55 1025 4.69 4.53 80 110
N 575 24000 144 1805 4.55 1025 4.69 3.40 80 110

Table B.5 Typical Capacitor Bank Values in uf/10 (For 380/460V AC Lineups)
Frame Size , A B C D E F G H
HP , 7.5- 15- 7.5- 20- 40- 75- 125- 150- 300- 300- 700-
0.5-1 1.5 2 3 5 1 3 15 60 250 250 250
10 20 10 30 60 100 150 200 450 600 800
1336 FORCE/ - - - - - - - 16 33 135 215 430 645 645 900 1200 1200 1500 - 2070 1500 2400 2400
1336 IMPACT 16 22 33 47 68 135 - - - - 215 430 645 645 900 1200 1200 1500 - 2070 1500 2400 2400
1336 PLUS/1336 16 22 33 47 68 135 135 - - - 215 430 645 645 900 1200 1200 1500 2070 2070 1500 2400 -

Table B.6 Typical Capacitor Bank Values in uf/10 (For 575V AC Lineups)
Frame Size , A B C D E F G H
HP , 15- 15- 25- 75- 200- 350- 300- 700-
1-10 1-10 125 150
20 20 60 100 300 400 600 800
1336 FORCE/SA3100 - - 90 140 290 400 600 900 1500 1800 2400 2400
1336 IMPACT 75 - - 140 290 400 600 900 1500 1800 2400 2400
1336 PLUS/1336 PLUS II 75 75 - - 290 400 600 900 1500 1800 2400 -

Table B.7 Typical Capacitor Bank Values for SA3000 Inverters (in uf/10)
Inverter 56A 70A 112A 140A 192A 240A 534A 972A 1457A
Capacitance 380 470 760 940 1330 1645 3200 6400 12800

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


B-4 Specifications

Environmental Specifications Table B.8 Operating Conditions


Altitude 3,300 feet (1,000 meters) "
Ambient Temperature 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) !
Relative Humidity 5% to 95%, non-condensing
" For altitudes higher than 1000 meters, derate RGU using Figure 2.
! For temperatures greater than 40 C, derate RGU using Figure 3.

Table B.9 Storage Conditions


Ambient Temperature 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F)
Relative Humidity 5% to 95%, non-condensing

Figure B.1
Altitude Derate Curve

% Rated RGU 105%


Cu rren t 100%
at 40 C 95%
90%
85%
80%
0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 m
(ft)
(3,300) (6,600) (9,900) (13,200)
Altitu de

Figure B.2
Temperature Derate Curve
% Rated RGU 105%
Current at 100%
Sea Level 95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 C
(F)
(32) (41) (50) (59) (68) (77) (86) (95) (104) (113) (122) (131)
Ambient Temperature

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Specifications B-5

Power Dissipation Figure B.3


J-Code RGU Watts Dissipation versus % Load
380V AC
1.50 k
460V AC 1.25 k

Watts Loss
1.00 k
575V AC
0.75 k
0.50 k
0.25 k
0.00 k
0 20 40 60 80 100
% Load

Figure B.4
K-Code RGU Watts Dissipation versus % Load

3.0 k
Watts Loss 2.5 k
2.0 k
1.5 k
1.0 k
0.5 k
0.0 k
0 20 40 60 80 100
% Load

Figure B.5
L-Code RGU Watts Dissipation versus % Load

5 k
4 k
Watts Loss

3 k
2 k
1 k
0 k
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% L o ad

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


B-6 Specifications

Figure B.6
M-Code RGU Watts Dissipation versus % Load

12 k
10 k

Watts Loss
8 k
6 k
4 k
2 k
0 k
0 20 40 60 80 100
% Load

Figure B.7
N-Code RGU Watts Dissipation versus % Load

12 k
10 k
Watts Loss

8 k
6 k
4 k
2 k
0 k
0 20 40 60 80 100
% Load

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Appendix C
Physical Details

Physical Specifications Table C.1 RGU Physical Specifications

Current Number of MCC


Height " Overall Width Overall Depth !
Code Sections
J 90" (2286 mm) 25" (635 mm) 15 or 20" (508 mm) 1
K 90" (2286 mm) 45" (1143 mm) 20" (508 mm) 2
L 91.5" (2324 mm) 55" (1397 mm) 20" (508 mm) 2
M 103.5" (2629 mm) # 70" (1778 mm) 25" (635 mm) 2
N 91.5" (2324 mm) 90" (2286 mm) 25" (635 mm) 3
The L, M, and N-code RGU heights include a 1.5 inch-high base channel (standard). This
base channel is an option for the J and K-code RGUs.
The M and N-code RGUs use both 20-inch deep MCC(s) and a 25-inch deep MCC, having
an overall depth of 25 inches. Figure 1 shows top-view illustrations of the M and N-code
RGUs.
The M-code height (103.5") includes the enclosure height (90"), the base channel (1.5"),
and a top hat assembly (12"). The top hat assembly is shipped loose from the unit.

Approximate Shipping Weights Table C.2 Approximate Shipping Weights

Unit Current Code Weight of Regenerative Module " Weight of Complete RGU Unit
J 85 lb (39 kg) 970 lb (440 kg)
K 260 lb (119 kg) 1450 lb (658 kg)
L 440 lb (200 kg) 2020 lb (916 kg)
M 1000 lb (455 kg) 2900 lb (1316 kg)
N 1000 lb (455 kg) 3850 lb (1746 kg)
The regenerative module for the J current code RGU is panel mounted. The regenerative
modules for the K, L, M, and N current code RGUs are built as roll-out module assemblies.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


C-2 Physical Details

MCC Structures and Bus Figure C.1


Architecture MCC Structures Showing Bus Architecture (J, K, and L-Code RGUs)

J-Code RGU K-Code RGU

20" 20"
Sides of J, K, and L-Code RGUs

25" 25" 20"


Left Right

90" 90"
16.92" 16.92"

L-Code RGU

20"
Sides of L-Code RGU

Left Right 30" 25"

91.5"
16.92" 16.92"
Legend (Top View )

DC Pow er
Bus

PE Bus
TE Bus

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Physical Details C-3

Figure C.2
MCC Structures Showing Bus Architecture (M and N-Code RGUs)

M -Code RGU N-Code RGU

20" 25" 20" 25"

35" 35" 20" 35" 35"


Sides of M and N-Code RG Us

Top Hat
Assem bly 12" Top Hat Assem bly
Left
(M -code) Right

103.5"

91.5" 91.5"
16.92" 16.92"

Note: For the M and N-code RGUs, the DC bus and control bus
(if selected) in the section containing the regenerative module is
at a depth greater than 16.92 inches, with the bus ends at a depth
of 16.92 inches (as shown in Figure C.2).

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


C-4 Physical Details

Wireway Meter Cover Details Figure C.3 shows the location and sizes of holes that can be made for
the mounting of meters in the wireway meter cover.

Figure C.3
Details of Meter-Mounting Holes

2.250
0.140 Diameter
1.125 (7 Holes)
2.813 Diameter Hole

1.125 2.375
2.250

0.797

1.368
2.736
Figure C.4
Wireway Meter Cover Layouts

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Physical Details C-5

25"-Wide (J and K-Code RGUs)


24.44"
22.19"

5.72"
5.22"
4.59" 3.813
TYP

30"-Wide (L-Code RGUs)


29.44"
5.72" 27.19"
5.22"

3.28" 3.813"
TYP

35"-Wide (M-Code RGUs)


34.44"
32.19"
5.72"
5.22"

3.88" 3.813"
TYP

20"-Wide (N-Code RGUs)


19.44"
17.19"
5.72"
5.22"

4.00" 3.813"
TYP

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


C-6 Physical Details

Recommended Disconnect Trip Table C.1 Recommended Disconnect Trip Settings


Settings
J-Code
B
A C
Motor Circuit Protector (MCP1) H D
150A, HMCP-frame G
F
E
Push to
Trip

K-Code

Motor Circuit Protector (MCP1) F E D F E D F E D

250A, HMCP-frame G C G C
Push to Trip
G C

H B H B H B

I A I A I A

L-Code

Motor Circuit Protector (MCP1) F E D F E D F E D


G C G C G C
Push to Trip
H B H B H B

I A I A I A

M -Code

Circuit Breaker (CB1) Digitrip RMS Rating Plug


Short Delay
800A, HND-frame Push In = Ir = 800A 5
to 4 6 Digitrip RMS
Trip
3 7 Trip Unit
Engaged 2 8
Remove Pickup x Ir

N-Code

Motor-Operated Circuit Breaker (CB1) Digitrip RMS Rating Plug


Short Delay
1200A, HND-frame Push In = Ir = 1200A 5
to 4 6 Digitrip RMS
Trip
3 7 Trip Unit
Engaged 2 8
Remove Pickup x Ir

Motor Circuit Protector (MCP2) A


B
C

30A, HMCP-frame H D
G E
F Push to
Trip

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Appendix D
Programming Parameters
This appendix lists the programming parameters for the RGU.

32 Host Command Word B Parameter Type Sink (Read/Write)


A [Host Command]
C Display Units
Drive Units
None
Display Units * 1
H
This parameter commands the processor to Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
D perform the function(s) indicated by each fault bit
which is set to 1.
Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
Maximum Value 0000 1111 1111 1111
For example, to command the processor to clear Related Parameters P33, P34, P35
faults, you would enter the command word, 0000
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
0000 0000 0001. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description

E
0 Clr Faults
F Sends a command to clear faults in the RGU
G
1 Enable Cmd Sends a command to Enable RGU control
2 Meter Reset Sends a command to reset the watt-hour meter
3 Save Command Sends a command to save parameters
4 Param Recall Sends a command to reset parameters
5 Default Init Sends a command to initialize parameters to their defaults
6 Clr Warnings Sends a command to clear warnings in the RGU
7 Reset Cmd Sends a command to reset the RGU
8 Clr Flt Que Sends a command to clear the fault queue
9 Clr Wrn Que Sends a command to clear the warning queue
10 Disable Cmd Sends a command to Disable the RGU control
11 Run Startup Sends a command to reset the RGU and to initiate the startup sequence
12-15 Not Used

A Parameter Number G Bit Description


This describes the function of the bit end may show its relationship
B Parameter Name with other parameters or conditions.

C Screen Text H Parameter Specifications


This indicates the name shown on the display. These fields indicate parameter attributes.
D Parameter Description Parameter Type Indicates whether the parameter is a source or
This describes the parameters function and its relationship with other sink, and whether it is read/write or read only.
parameters. This may include diagrams and programming examples. Display Units Indicates the units shown on the display (i.e. %,
Volts, uH).
Drive Units Indicates the conversion formula for internal units.
E Bit Number
For example, if the drive units are equal to
For parameters displayed as words, the bits are displayed on the screen
Display Units x 5120/100, a value of 15 on the
from 15 to 0. Each bit can be set separately (if read/write parameter).
display would be stored as 768 (15 x 5120/100)
internally.
F Bit Name
Factory Default Indicates the default value for this parameter.
This indicates the bit name shown on the display screen. Minimum Value Indicates the minimum value allowed.
Maximum Value Indicates the maximum value allowed.
Related Parameters Lists other parameters that are related in some
way to this parameter.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-2 Programming Parameters

1 RGU Software Version


[Software Version]

This parameter shows the version of software that


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 100
Factory Default 3.01
is currently installed in the RGU. Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 99.99

2 Password
[Password]

This parameter sets the user password.


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
To select no password, set this to zero. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535

3 Language Select
[Language Sel]

This parameter is used to select the display


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
language. Minimum Value 0
Value Description Maximum Value 0
0 English

4 Frame Catalog Number


[Frame Catalog #]

This parameter stores the frame catalog number


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 11
of the RGU, describing the current code and input. Minimum Value 0
This value is used to configure P10, P11, P12,
and P16. Maximum Value 15

Value Description Value Description


0 Not Used 8 2364FA-LNB (L-code, 460V AC)
1 2364FA-JNN (J-code, 380V AC) 9 2364FA-LNC (L-code, 575V AC)
2 2364FA-JNB (J-code, 460V AC) 10 2364FA-MNN (M-code, 380V AC)
3 2364FA-JNC (J-code, 575V AC) 11 2364FA-MNB (M-code, 460V AC)
4 2364FA-KNN (K-code, 380V AC) 12 2364FA-MNC (M-code, 575V AC)
5 2364FA-KNB (K-code, 460V AC) 13 2364FA-NNN (N-code, 380V AC)
6 2364FA-KNC (K-code, 575V AC) 14 2364FA-NNB (N-code, 460V AC)
7 2364FA-LNN (L-code, 380V AC) 15 2364FA-NNC (N-code, 575V AC)

5 RGU Control Mode


[RGU Control Mode]

This parameter is used to automatically configure


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 2
other parameters for a master-slave or a Minimum Value 0
standalone configuration.
Maximum Value 2
Related Parameters None
Value Description
0 Master Mode
1 Slave Mode
2 Standalone

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-3

6 Unit Selection
[Unit Selection]

This parameter selects the units (display or drive)


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
to be shown on the display. Minimum Value 0
Selection 0 (Display Units) is recommended for Maximum Value 1
setup and drive operation. Related Parameters None

Value Description
0 Display Units
1 Drive Units

7 P7 is for internal use only.

8 Remote/Local Selector
[Rem/Loc Selector]

This parameter determines if a HIM, GPT, or


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1
SCANport device can Enable or disable the RGU. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Related Parameters None
Value Description
0 Local Only The RGU will modulate when the M1 contactor closes. A HIM, GPT, or SCANport device
cannot start or Enable the RGU, but the Stop is always active.
1 Remote+Local The HIM, GPT, or SCANport device can be used to Enable or Disable the RGU.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-4 Programming Parameters

9 RGU State of Operation


[RGU State]

This parameter indicates the RGUs state of


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
operation during the power-up sequence and Minimum Value 0
during normal operation.
Maximum Value 9
Related Parameters None
Value Description
0 HW Init Indicates that the RGU hardware is initiating (startup or reset)
1 No Bus Voltage Indicates that the DC bus is not yet powered
2 Precharging Indicates that the RGU is precharging the capacitors
3 Closing M1 Indicates that precharging is complete and the main contactor M1 is closing
4 Flt, M1 Closed Indicates that the RGU is faulted, M1 is closed
5 Flt, M1 Open Indicates that the RGU is faulted, M1 is opened
6 HW Failure Indicates that hardware failure has occured in the RGU
7 Crtl Ready Indicates that the RGU control is ready for operation
8 Starting Ctrl Indicates that the RGU control is starting operation
9 Ctrl Running Indicates that the RGU control is processing

Hardware
Failure

Timeout or Hard
Not Hard Hardware Timeout Bus Not Up Fault
Fault Error Not Enabled
Not
Bus Hard
Hardware No Bus Up Fault, M1 Fault Control Starting Control
Precharging Closing M1
Initiate Voltage Closed Ready Control Running

Hard Fault Hard Fault

Fault, M1
Open

10 Nominal AC Line Voltage


[Nom Line Voltage]

This parameter stores the nominal input line


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
Vrms
Display Units * 1
Factory Default See below
voltage of the RGU. Minimum Value See below
Maximum Value See below
Related Parameters P4, P14, P26, P27
RGUs with a 380V AC Input RGUs with a 460V AC Input RGUs with a 575V AC Input
Factory Default 380 Factory Default 460 Factory Default 575
Minimum Value 198 Minimum Value 207 Minimum Value 258
Maximum Value 418 Maximum Value 506 Maximum Value 633

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-5

11 Rated AC Line Current


[Rated AC Current]

This parameter stores the rated input line current


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
Amp
Display Units * 10
Factory Default See below
of the RGU. Minimum Value See below
Maximum Value See below
Related Parameters P4, P96, P100, P106
J-code RGUs K-code RGUs L-code RGUs M-code RGUs N-Code RGUs
Factory Default 76.9 Factory Default 181.8 Factory Default 330.0 (286.0*) Factory Default 678.0 (602.0*) Factory Default 906.0 (802.0*)
Minimum Value 43.4 Minimum Value 93.6 Minimum Value 200.3 Minimum Value 421.4 Minimum Value 561.5
Maximum Value 84.6 Maximum Value 200.0 Maximum Value 363.4 Maximum Value 746.2 Maximum Value 996.6

* Value applies to units with 575V AC inputs

12 AC Line Reactor Inductance


[Line Inductance]

This parameter lists the total inductance of the AC


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read Only)
uH
Display Units * 1
Factory Default See below
line reactors (CH1-3) in standalone RGU Minimum Value 0
configurations. Check the labels on the AC
reactors to verify value. Maximum Value 3000
Related Parameters P4
J-code RGUs K-code RGUs L-code RGUs M-code RGUs N-Code RGUs
Factory 1193 (380/460V) Factory 510 (380/460V) Factory 317 (380/460V) Factory 137 (380/460V) Factory 102 (380/460V)
Default 1853 (575V) Default 832 (575V) Default 404 (575V) Default 191 (575V) Default 144 (575V)

13 Utility AC Line Frequency


[Utility AC Freq]

This parameter defines the input frequency of the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Hz
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 60
RGU. Set to 50 or 60Hz. Minimum Value 45
Maximum Value 65
Related Parameters None

14 Measured AC Line Voltage


[Line Voltage]
This parameter measures the incoming voltage on
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Vrms
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
the AC line. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 800
Related Parameters P10, P15

15 AC Line Voltage Calibration


[Line Voltage Cal]

This parameter measures the voltage on the input


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
%
Display Units * 720/1000
Factory Default 0
line. The RGU must be Disabled (not modulating) Minimum Value -3.1
when calibrating with this parameter.
Maximum Value 3.1
Related Parameters P14
To calibrate the measured AC line voltage (P14),
adjust P15 until the value of P14 matches the
reading of the AC input voltage on an external
voltmeter.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-6 Programming Parameters

16 Nominal DC Bus Voltage


[Nom DC Bus Volts]

This parameter stores the nominal voltage on the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 1
Factory Default See below
DC bus. The nominal DC bus voltage is Minimum Value See below
calculated as the nominal AC line voltage
multiplied by the square root of two. Maximum Value See below
Related Parameters P4, P28, P29, P30, P141
RGUs with a 380V AC Input RGUs with a 460V AC Input RGUs with a 575V AC Input
Factory Default 580 Factory Default 700 Factory Default 848
Minimum Value 200 Minimum Value 200 Minimum Value 200
Maximum Value 800 Maximum Value 800 Maximum Value 1000

17,18 P17 and P18 are for internal use only.

19 Seconds Counter
[Seconds Counter]

This parameter displays a running counter (in


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
sec
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
seconds). This can be used to verify that the Minimum Value 0
system processor is running.
Maximum Value 65535

20 Master Status
[Master Status]

This parameter displays the status of the master


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
RGU in a master-slave configuration. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
This status is sent to a slave unit through P272 Maximum Value 0000 0000 0000 0011
(RGU-to-RGU Transmit Indirect). If this unit is Related Parameters P5, P272, P274
not the master, the master status is received through
P274 (RGU-to-RGU Receive 1, Indirect 1).

Bit Description
0 EnabledIndicates that the master unit is enabled.
1 FaultedIndicates that the master unit is faulted.
2-15 Not Used

21-25 P21-P25 are for internal use only.

26 AC Line Low Setting


[Line Low Setting]

This parameter defines the lowest acceptable AC


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Vrms
Display Units * 1
Factory Default See below
line voltage. A fault or warning may be indicated Minimum Value 0
in P180 (Host Fault Status Word 3)if the AC line
voltage drops below the value of this parameter. Maximum Value 800
Related Parameters P14, P27, P180
RGUs with a 380V AC Input RGUs with a 460V AC Input RGUs with a 575V AC Input
Factory Default 356 Factory Default 432 Factory Default 540

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-7

27 AC Line High Setting


[Line Hi Setting]

This parameter defines the highest acceptable AC


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Vrms
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 528 (110% of 480V AC)
line voltage. A fault or warning may be indicated Minimum Value 0
in P180 (Host Fault Status Word 3) if the AC line
voltage exceeds the value of this parameter. Maximum Value 800
Related Parameters P14, P26, P180
RGUs with a 380V AC Input RGUs with a 460V AC Input RGUs with a 575V AC Input
Factory Default 436 Factory Default 528 Factory Default 660

28 DC Bus Low Setting


[Bus Low Setting]

This parameter defines the lowest acceptable DC


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 5/7 * P16
bus voltage. A fault or warning may be indicated Minimum Value 0
in P174 (Host Fault Status Word 1) if the DC bus
voltage falls below the value of this parameter. Maximum Value 1.5 * P16
Related Parameters P16, P29, P141, P174

29 DC Bus High Setting


[Bus Hi Setting]

This parameter defines the highest acceptable DC


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 8/7 * P16
bus voltage. A fault or warning may be indicated Minimum Value 0
in P174 (Host Fault Status Word 1) if the DC bus
voltage exceeds the value of this parameter. Maximum Value 1.5 * P16
Related Parameters P16, P28, P141, P174

30 DC Bus Voltage Tolerance


[Bus V Tolerance]

This parameter defines the acceptable voltage


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/118
Factory Default 0.005 * P16 (0.5% of P16)
tolerance on the DC bus. The DC bus is Minimum Value 0
considered to be at voltage when the value of
P141 (Bus Feedback) is within the range of P126 Maximum Value 0.029 * P16 (2.9% of P16)
(Bus Rate Reference) +/- P30. Related Parameters P16, P34, P141, P126

When the voltage is within the tolerance, the Bus


at Volt bit of P34 (Host Status 2) is set to 1

31 P31 is for internal use only.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-8 Programming Parameters

32 Host Command Word


[Host Command]

This parameter commands the processor to


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
perform the function(s) indicated by each fault bit Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
which is set to 1.
Maximum Value 0000 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P33, P34, P35
For example, to command the processor to clear Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
faults, you would enter the command 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
word, 0000 0000 0000 0001.

Bit Description
0 Clr Faults Sends a command to clear faults in the RGU
1 Enable Cmd Sends a command to Enable RGU control
2 Meter Reset Sends a command to reset the watt-hour meter
3 Save Command Sends a command to save parameters
4 Param Recall Sends a command to reset parameters
5 Default Init Sends a command to initialize parameters to their defaults
6 Clr Warnings Sends a command to clear warnings in the RGU
7 Reset Cmd Sends a command to reset the RGU
8 Clr Flt Que Sends a command to clear the fault queue
9 Clr Wrn Que Sends a command to clear the warning queue
10 Disable Cmd Sends a command to Disable the RGU control
11 Run Startup Sends a command to reset the RGU and to initiate the startup sequence
12-15 Not Used

33 Host Status Word 1


[Host Status 1]

This parameter indicates a number of conditions


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
that the RGU is experiencing. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
A condition is indicated by the bit being set to 1. Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
For example, the word, 0000 0011 0100 0000, Related Parameters P32, P34, P35
indicates that the DC bus is at voltage, the DSP Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
processor is ready, and control is ready. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description
0 Hard Fault Indicates that a hard fault has occurred.
1 Warning Flt Indicates that a warning fault has occurred.
2 Clr Faults Indicates that clear fault command(s) are pending.
3 Clr Warnings Indicates that clear warning command(s) are pending.
4 BCR Relay Indicates that the bus control relay is closed.
5 Bus 1/2 Up Indicates that the DC bus is at half of the rated voltage.
6 Bus Up Indicates that the DC bus is at rated voltage.
7 Enable Indicates that the RGU control is enabled.
8 DSP Ready Indicates that the DSP processor is ready.
9 Ctrl Ready Indicates that the RGU control is ready.
10-14 Not Used
15 Ctrl Running The RGU control is active.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-9

34 Host Status Word 2


[Host Status 2]

This parameter indicates a number of conditions


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
that the RGU is experiencing. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
A condition is indicated by the bit being set to 1. Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
For example, the word, 1000 0011 0100 0000, Related Parameters P32, P33, P35
indicates that the RGU is regenerating current to Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
the AC line, the M1 contactor is closed, the DC 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
bus is at voltage, and the RGU control is active.

Bit Description
0 Hard Fault Indicates that a hard fault has occurred
1 Warning Flt Indicates that a warning fault has occurred
2 pf Lagging Indicates that the power factor is lagging (AC line voltage is lagging the current)
3 Iq Pos Limit Indicates that the AC line active current (Iq) is at the positive limit
4 Iq Neg Limit Indicates that the AC line active current (Iq) is at the negative limit
5 Ext ClrFault Indicates that an external clear fault is required
6 Regen Cur Indicates that the RGU is renerating current to the AC line
7 Ext Enable Indicates that an external enable is activated
8 M1 Closed Indicates that the main contactor M1 is closed
9 Bus at Volt Indicates that the DC bus is at voltage
10 i2t Active Indicates that the wire overtemperature monitor (i2t) is active
11 i2t Warning Indicates that there is a wire overtemperature (i2t) warning
12-14 Not Used
15 Ctrl Running Indicates that the RGU control is active

35 Host Mode
[Host Mode]

This parameter initiates the commands listed


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 1000
below. To initiate commands, set each Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
appropriate bit to 1.
For example, to initiate the Error Limiter, Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
set P35 to 0000 0000 0000 0010. Related Parameters P32, P33, P34
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Description
0 Regen Only Regenerative mode only (used with parallel NRU).
1 Err Limiter Enables the Error Limiter.
2 Aux Limit Activates the auxiliary limit as the current limit.
3 Linearizer Activates the linearizer.
4-15 Not Used

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-10 Programming Parameters

36 A/D Converter 0 Input


[ADC0 Input]
This parameter provides the diagnostics from the
ADC0 input ( TB1-1, TB1-2, TB1-3 [gnd]).
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
An external analog device can be wired to the Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
ADC0 input. The analog voltage (10V) sent by
the device is sampled by a 14-bit analog-to-digital Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
converter (ADC) and the resulting value is stored Related Parameters P37
in this parameter. See Pages 7-6, 11-1
The value of this parameter provides a digital
representation of the analog input which can then To ADC0
Quick Reference Chart
be used by other parameters (to read the device G nd
status, perform calculations, etc.).
10

Analog Input Voltage (V DC)


1 2 3 8
The quick reference chart can be used to convert 6
the display values into analog input voltage. TB1 4
2
0
-2

Analog In 1 (-)

Analog In 1 (+)

Analog In 1 (Com)
-4
-6
-8
-10
-8200 -6150 -4100 -2050 0 2050 4100 6150 8200
To Analog ADC Display Values
Device

37 A/D Converter 1 Input


[ADC1 Input]
This parameter provides the diagnostics from the
ADC1 input ( TB1-4, TB1-5, TB1-6 [gnd]).
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
An external analog device can be wired to the Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
ADC1 input. The voltage (10V) sent by the
device is sampled by a 14-bit analog-to-digital Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
converter (ADC) and the resulting value is stored Related Parameters P36
in this parameter. See Pages 7-6, 11-1
The value of this parameter provides a digital
representation of the analog input which can then
be used by other parameters (to read the device To ADC1
G nd
status, perform calculations, etc.).

The listing for P36 shows a quick reference chart 4 5 6


for converting the display values into the analog
input voltage. TB1
Analog In 2 (-)
Analog In 2 (+)

Analog In 2 (Com)

To Analog
Device

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-11

38 A/D Converter 2 Input


[14 Bit A/D Chan 2]

This parameter receives an analog-to-digital


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
sample from the DC bus to provide the value for Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
the Scaled Bus Feedback (P143).
Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
Related Parameters P139, P143
This parameter is sent to P143 when
Host Channel is selected in the Bus Voltage
Input Select (P139 = 2).

The listing for P36 shows a quick reference


chart for converting the display value into
the analog input voltage.

39 A/D Converter 3 Input


[14 Bit A/D Chan 3]

This parameter receives an analog-to-digital


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
sample from the negative DC bus and PE to Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
provide the value for P146 (Negative DC Bus To
Ground Voltage). Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
Related Parameters P146
The listing for P36 shows a quick reference
chart for converting the display value into
the analog input voltage.

40 A/D Converter 4 Input


[14 Bit A/D Chan 4]

This parameter receives an analog-to-digital


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
sample from the positive DC bus and PE to Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
provide the value for P145 (Positive DC Bus To
Ground Voltage). Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
Related Parameters P145
The listing for P36 shows a quick reference
chart for converting the display value into
the analog input voltage.

41 A/D Converter 5 Input


[14 Bit A/D Chan 5]

This parameter receives an analog-to-digital


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
sample from the AC line to provide the value for Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
P14 (Measured AC Line Voltage).
The listing for P36 shows a quick reference chart Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
for converting the display value into the analog Related Parameters P14
input voltage.

42 A/D Converter 6 Input


[14 Bit A/D Chan 6]

This parameter receives an analog-to-digital


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
sample from the AC line (composite line voltage) Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
to provide the value for P14 (Measured AC Line
Voltage). Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
Related Parameters P14
The listing for P36 shows a quick reference
chart for converting the display value into
the analog input voltage.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-12 Programming Parameters

43 A/D Converter 7 Input


[14 Bit A/D Chan 7]

This parameter receives an analog-to-digital


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
sample from the heatsink thermoswitches to Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
provide the value for P87 (Heatsink Temperature).
Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
Related Parameters P187
The listing for P36 shows a quick reference
chart for converting the display value into
the analog input voltage.

44 A/D Converter 8 Input


[14 Bit A/D Chan 8]

This parameter receives an analog-to-digital


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
sample (+15V). Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
The listing for P36 shows a quick reference chart
for converting the display value into
the analog input voltage.

45 A/D Converter 9 Input


[14 Bit A/D Chan 9]

This parameter receives an analog-to-digital


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
sample (-15V). Minimum Value -8191 (-10V signal)
Maximum Value 8191 (+10V signal)
The listing for P36 shows a quick reference chart
for converting the display value into
the analog input voltage.

46 P46 is for internal use only.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-13

47 D/A Converter 1 Output


[DAC1 Output]
This parameter contains the value that is to be
sent to the digital-to-analog converter, then to
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
Analog Out 1 ( TB1-7, TB1-8 [com]). Minimum Value -2048 (-10V signal)
The display value (-2048 to 2047) represents the Maximum Value 2047 (+10V signal)
digital value, which is proportional to the voltage Related Parameters P49, P50, P51, P52
sent through Analog Out 1 (-10V to +10V). See Chapter 11
An external analog device can be wired to Analog
Out 1 (DAC1 Output), and can read the contents DAC1
Quick Reference Chart
of a parameter, selected by P49 (D/A Converter 1
Source). 10

Analog Output Voltage (V DC)


8
7 8
The quick reference chart can be used to convert 6
4
the display value into the analog output voltage. TB1
2
0
The diagram below shows how the source -2

Analog Out 1
Analog Out 1 (Com)
-4
parameter value is processed using P49, P50, -6
P51, P52, P47, then sent to the DAC for Analog -8
Out. -10
-2048 -1536 -1024 -512 0 512 1024 1536 2048

To Analog DAC Display Values


Device

P49 P50 P51 P52 P47


DAC1 DAC1 DAC1 DAC1 DAC1
Analog Out 1
Indirect Offset Gain Cutoff Freq Output

determines +/- adjustment to value multiplier to value in adjusts the sends the resulting
source parameter in source parameter source parameter frequency value to Analog Out 1

Pxxx
Source
Parameter

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-14 Programming Parameters

48 D/A Converter 2 Output


[DAC2 Output]
This parameter contains the value that is to be
sent to the digital-to-analog converter, then to
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
Analog Out 2 ( TB1-9, TB1-10 [com]). Minimum Value -2048 (-10V signal)
The display value (-2048 to 2047) represents the Maximum Value 2047 (+10V signal)
digital value, which is proportional to the voltage Related Parameters P53, P54, P55, P56
sent through Analog Out 2 (-10V to +10V). See Chapter 11
An external analog device can be wired to Analog
Out 2 (DAC2 Output), and can read the contents DAC2
Quick Reference Chart
of a parameter, selected by P53 (D/A Converter 2
Source). 10

Analog Output Voltage (V DC)


8
9 10
The quick reference chart can be used to convert 6
4
the display value into the analog output voltage. TB1
2
0
See the diagram for P46 (D/A Converter 1 Source) -2

Analog Out 2
Analog Out 2 (Com)
-4
for an example of how a source parameter is -6
processed for Analog Out. -8
-10
-2048 -1536 -1024 -512 0 512 1024 1536 2048
To Analog DAC Display Values
Device

49 D/A Converter 1 Source


[DAC1 Indirect]

This parameter identifies the parameter value


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 141 (Bus Feedback Parameter)
which will be sent to DAC1 and out to Analog Out Minimum Value 0
1. The P47 listing (D/A Converter 1 Output)
shows a diagram of the DAC process. Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
Related Parameters P47, P50, P51, P52
The default selection is P141 (Bus Feedback). See Chapter 11

50 D/A Converter 1 Offset


[DAC1 Offset]

This parameter determines the +/- adjustment to


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
the value being sent to DAC1 (which is indicated Minimum Value -32768
by P49 [D/A Converter Source]). This offset is
applied before the gain (P51). Maximum Value 32767
The P47 listing (D/A Converter 1 Output) shows a Related Parameters P47, P49, P51, P52
diagram of the DAC process. See Chapter 11

51 D/A Converter 1 Gain


[DAC1 Gain]

This parameter determines the gain adjustment to


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 256
Factory Default 0.25
the value being sent to DAC1 (which is indicated Minimum Value -128.00
by P49 [D/A Converter Source]). This gain is
applied after the offset (P50). Maximum Value 128.00
The P47 listing (D/A Converter 1 Output) shows a Related Parameters P47, P49, P50, P52
diagram of the DAC process. See Chapter 11

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-15

52 D/A Converter 1 Frequency


[DAC1 Cutoff Freq]

This parameter determines the cutoff frequency


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
R/S (rads/sec)
Display Units * 10
Factory Default 0 (Filter Off)
for the value being sent to DAC1 (which is Minimum Value 0
indicated by P49 [D/A Converter Source]). This
action is applied after the offset (P50) and gain Maximum Value 3276.7
(P51). Related Parameters P47, P49, P50, P51
To turn the filter off, set this to 0. See Chapter 11
The P47 listing (D/A Converter 1 Output) shows
a diagram of the DAC process.

53 D/A Converter 2 Source


[DAC2 Indirect]

This parameter identifies the parameter value


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 108 (Total Line Current)
which will be sent to DAC2 and out to Analog Out Minimum Value 0
2. The P48 listing (D/A Converter 2 Output)
shows a diagram of the DAC process. Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
The default selection is P108 (Total Line Current). Related Parameters P48, P54, P55, P56
See Chapter 11

54 D/A Converter 2 Offset


[DAC2 Offset]

This parameter determines the +/- adjustment


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
made to the value being sent to DAC2 (which is Minimum Value -32767
indicated by P53 [D/A Converter Source]). This
offset is applied before the gain (P55). Maximum Value 32767
The P47 listing (D/A Converter 1 Output) shows a Related Parameters P48, P53, P55, P56
diagram of the DAC process. See Chapter 11

55 D/A Converter 2 Gain


[DAC2 Gain]

This parameter determines the gain adjustment


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 256
Factory Default 0.25
made to the value being sent to DAC2 (which is Minimum Value -128.00
indicated by P53 [D/A Converter Source]). This
gain is applied after the offset (P54). Maximum Value 128.00
The P47 listing (D/A Converter 1 Output) shows a Related Parameters P48, P53, P54, P56
diagram of the DAC process. See Chapter 11

56 D/A Converter 2 Frequency


[DAC2 Cutoff Freq]

This parameter determines the cutoff frequency


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
R/S (rads/sec)
Display Units * 10
Factory Default 0 (Filter Off)
for the value being sent to DAC2 (which is Minimum Value 0
indicated by P53 [D/A Converter Source]). This
action is applied after the offset (P54) and gain Maximum Value 3276.7
(P55). Related Parameters P48, P53, P54, P55
To turn the filter off, set this to 0. See Chapter 11

The P47 listing (D/A Converter 1 Output) shows


a diagram of the DAC process.

57-59 P57-P59 are for internal use only.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-16 Programming Parameters

60 DSP DC Bus Voltage


[DSP DC Bus]

This parameter measures the DC bus voltage for


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 4
Factory Default 0
P143 (Scaled Bus Feedback) using the DSP. Minimum Value -8196
This parameter is sent to P143 when DSP Maximum Value 8188
Channel is selected in the Bus Voltage Input Related Parameters P38, P61, P139, P143
Select (P139 = 1).

The displayed value of this parameter


corresponds to the drive units of P143.

The value of 4096 indicates that the bus voltage


feedback equals the Nominal DC Bus Voltage
(P16).

61 DSP Average Bus Voltage


[DSP Ave DC Bus]

This parameter sends the average DC bus voltage


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 4
Factory Default 0
from the DSP to P143 (Scaled Bus Feedback). Minimum Value -8196
This parameter is only sent to P143 when DSP Maximum Value 8188
Related Parameters P38, P60, P139, P143
Averaged is selected in the Bus Voltage Input
Select (P139 = 0).

The displayed value of this parameter corresponds to


the drive units of P143.

The value of 4096 indicates that the bus voltage


feedback equals the Nominal DC Bus Voltage (P16).

62 DSP Status Word


[DSP Status]

This parameter indicates the status of the DSP,


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
which is the processor used in the current loop. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
A condition is indicated by the bit being set to 1. Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
For example, the word 0000 0001 0000 0000 Related Parameters P38, P60, P139, P143
indicates that the DSP is ready.
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description
0-7 Not Used
8 DSP Ready Indicates that the DSP is ready
9 DSP Running Indicates that the DSP is running
10 DSP Fault Indicates that a DSP fault has occured
11-15 Not Used

63 P63 is for internal use only.

64 Current Loop Cross Couple Gain


[CrossCouple Gain]

This parameter indicates the cross couple gain


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 752
from the PI current regulator. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-17

65 Iq Reference to DPS
[Iq Ref Scaled]

This parameter indicates the scaled active current


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
reference (Iq) to be used by P96 Minimum Value 0
(Iq Current Reference).
Maximum Value 65535

66 Id Reference to DPS
[Id Ref Scaled]

This parameter indicates the scaled reactive


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
current reference (Id) to be used by P93 Minimum Value 0
(Id Reference).
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P93

67 Ide Current Limit to DPS


[Ide Current Lim]
This parameter indicates the reactive current limit
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
value to be by P104 (Id Positive Current Limit). Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P104

68 Current Loop Ki
[Current Loop Ki]

This parameter indicates the current loop integral


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 89
gain (Ki). This provides an intermediate value Minimum Value 0
which is to be used by other parameters.
Maximum Value 65535

69 Current Loop Kp
[Current Loop Kp]

This parameter indicates the current loop


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 2392
proportional gain (Kp). This provides an Minimum Value 0
intermediate value to be used by other
parameters. Maximum Value 65535

70 Id Feedback DSP
[Net Id Cmd, DSP]

This parameter indicates the DSP command for


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0
the Id feedback converter. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535

71 Iq Feedback DSP
[Iqe Fbk DSP]

This parameter indicates the DSP command for


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
the Iq feedback converter. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535

72-82 P72-P82 are for internal use only.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-18 Programming Parameters

83 It Foldback Current Limit


[It Fldbk Cur Lim]

This parameter indicates what percentage of the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
%
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 300
rated DC bus current is being supplied by the Minimum Value 0
RGU. The percentage decreases as the heatsink
temperature increases. Maximum Value 300
A value of 300% is displayed when the RGU is
not enabled.

84 Voltage Regulator Output


[Linear PI Out]

This parameter indicates the current reference


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0
from the PI regulator (P121) after it has passed Minimum Value -640
the linearizer. Note that P35 bit 3 must be set to 1
to activate the linearizer. Maximum Value 640
Related Parameters P35, P121
The value is displayed as a percentage of the
Rated AC Line Current (P11).

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-19

85 P85 is for internal use only.

86 Transistor Junction Temperature


[Abs Junct Temp]

This parameter indicates the calculated IGBT


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
degC
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
junction temperature. This value is used by the Minimum Value -50
fault status parameters to indicate when high and
excessive temperatures occur. Maximum Value 150

87 Heatsink Temperature
[Heatsink Temp]

This parameter indicates the measured heatsink


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
degC
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
temperature. This value is used by the fault status Minimum Value -50
parameters to indicate when high and excessive
temperatures occur. Maximum Value 127

88 Auxiliary Iq Current Limit


[Aux Iq Limit]

This parameter specifies the limit imposed on P89


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 150.0
(Auxiliary Iq Current Command). Minimum Value 0.0
The value of this parameter (current limit) is Maximum Value 150.0
displayed as a percentage of the Rated AC Line Related Parameters P11, P89
Current (P11).
This parameter is only activated when Aux
Limit is selected in Host Mode (P35 bit 2 = 1).

89 Auxiliary Iq Current Command


[Aux Iq Command]

This parameter can be used to send an Iq


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
command (current reference) to the current limiter. Minimum Value -120.0
This command can passed as the total Iq
command, or can be added to the PI regulator Maximum Value 120
value (P121, Voltage Loop PI Output). Related Parameters P88, P90, P273
See Chapters 1, 9
The value entered into this parameter is used
only when PI +Aux Cmd or Aux Iq Cmd is
selected in the Iq Mode Select (when P90 = 1
or P90 = 2).

This parameter can receive the Iq command


from another RGU through P273 (RGU-to-RGU
Receive 1, Indirect 1).

90 Iq Mode Select
[Iq Mode Select]

This parameter selects the current reference input


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
to be passed to the current limiter. Minimum Value 0
Set this parameter to one of the values listed Maximum Value 3
below. Related Parameters P89, P94, P121
Value Description
0 Lin PI Out Selects the PI regulator output (P121). This is the normal selection for a standalone or master RGU.
1 PI + Aux Cmd Selects the PI regulator output value plus the Auxiliary Iq Command value (P121+P89). This allows P89 to be used as a trim value.
2 Aux Iq Cmd Selects the Auxiliary Iq Command (P89). This is normally used by a slave RGU which is receiving its Iq commands from a master RGU.
3 No Iq Cmd Selects 0 as the Iq Command

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-20 Programming Parameters

3 0 Lin PI Out
0 1 PI + Aux Cmd
Iq P89 2 Aux Iq Cmd
2
Command Auxiliary Iq 3 No Iq Cmd
(from Command
Master RGU) +
1

P121 + 0 P94
PI Regulator Voltage Iq
Loop PI Command Current
Output Limiter

P90
Iq Mode
Select

91 Iq Positive Current Limit


[Iq Pos Limit]

This parameter defines the active current limit


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of 11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 150.0
(positive). Minimum Value 10.0
This value is displayed as a percentage of the Maximum Value 150.0
Rated AC Line Current (P11).

92 Iq Negative Current Limit


[Iq Neg Limit]

This parameter defines the active current limit


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of 11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default -150.0
(negative). Minimum Value -150.0
This value is displayed as a percentage of the Maximum Value -10.0
Rated AC Line Current (P11).

93 Id Reference
[Id Reference]

This parameter displays the output of the reactive


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
current (Id) limiter. Minimum Value -60.0
This value is displayed as a percentage of the Maximum Value 60.0
Rated AC Line Current (P11).

94 Iq Current Command
[Iq Command]
This parameter displays the Iq command being
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
sent to the Current Limiter. Minimum Value -640.0
This value may be determined by the PI regulator Maximum Value 640.0
and/or by an auxiliary Iq command from a master Related Parameters P89, P90, P121
RGU.
The listing for P90 shows how the value for
this parameter is determined.

95 Filtered Iq Current Reference


[Filtered Iq Ref]

This parameter displays the filtered value of the Iq


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
Current Reference (P96). Minimum Value -150.0
This value is displayed as a percentage of the Maximum Value 150.0
Rated AC Line Current (P11). Related Parameters P94, P96

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-21

96 Iq Current Reference
[Iq Reference]

This parameter specifies the active current


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
reference (Iq) used by the current regulator loop. Minimum Value -150.0
This value is displayed as a percentage of the Maximum Value 150.0
Rated AC Line Current (P11). Related Parameters P94, P95, P271

97 Net Positive Current Limit


[Net Iq Pos Limit]

This parameter displays the value of the positive


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 150.0
active current limit (Iq). Minimum Value 10.0
This value is displayed as a percentage of the Maximum Value 150.0
Rated AC Line Current (P11). Related Parameters P91, P98

98 Net Negative Current Limit


[Net Iq Neg Limit]

This parameter displays the value of the negative


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default -150.0
active current limit (Iq). Minimum Value -10.0
This value is displayed as a percentage of the Maximum Value -150.0
Rated AC Line Current (P11). Related Parameters P91, P98

99 Iq Feedback Offset
[Iq Fbk Offset]

This parameter is used to offset the Iq feedback


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
%
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0
value before it is stored in P100 (Iq Feedback), Minimum Value -2.4
and is used to offset the output of P96 (Iq
Reference) when it is passed to the current limiter. Maximum Value 2.4
Related Parameters P96, P100
Adjust this value to compensate for any offsets P96
in the system.

Iq +
Reference Current
+ Limiter

P99
Iq
Feedback
Offset

+ P100
Active
Current
Feedback
+
Iq
Feedback

100 Iq Feedback
[Iq Feedback]

This parameter specifies the measured Iq


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
feedback (real or active current), displayed as a Minimum Value -640.0
percentage of the Rated AC Line Current (P11).
This value is used when calculating the Total Line Maximum Value 640.0
Current (P108). Related Parameters P96, P99, P106, P108
+ Motoring - Regenerating

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-22 Programming Parameters

101 Auxiliary Id Command


[Aux Id Command]

This parameter specifies a value which can be


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
used to add to the value of the Id Current Minimum Value -40.0
Command (P102), or can be used as the source
sent directly to the Id limiter. Maximum Value 60.0
Related Parameters P93, P102, P103
This parameter is used when Aux Id Cmd or
Id Cmd + Aux is selected in the Id Mode Select
(P103 = 2 or 3).

102 Id Current Command


[Id Command]

This parameter specifies the Id current command


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
which can be passed to the Id limiter. Minimum Value -40.0
This parameter is used when Id Command or Id Maximum Value 60.0
Cmd + Aux is selected in the Id Mode Select Related Parameters P93, P101, P103
(P103 = 1 or 3).

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-23

103 Id Mode Select


[Id Mode Select]

This parameter selects the Id current reference to


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
be sent to the Id limiter. Minimum Value 0
Select the Id limiter input from the list below. Maximum Value 3
Related Parameters P93, P101, P102

0 None
3
Value Description +
1 Id Command
0 None Selects 0% as the input to the Id limiter. P101 + 2 Aux Id Cmd
2
1 Id Command Selects the value in P102 (Id Command) as the input Auxiliary Id 3 Id Cmd + Aux
Command
to the Id limiter.
P102 1
2 Aux Id Cmd Selects the value in P101 (Auxiliary Id Command) as Id Current
the input to the Id limiter. Command

3 Id Cmd + Aux Selects the sum of P102 (Id Command) and P101 0
(Auxiliary Id Command) as the input to the Id limiter. 0
Id Limiter
P103
Id Mode
Select

104 Id Positive Current Limit


[Id Pos Limit]

This parameter determines the maximum value for


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 60.0
the Id Reference (P93). The value of this Minimum Value 0.0
parameter is passed to the Id limiter.
Maximum Value 60.0
This parameter is selected as the source to the Related Parameters P35, P93, P105
Id limiter when P35 bit 0 = 0 (when the Host Mode,
Regen Only bit is set to zero). This limit
is selected by default.

When P35 bit 0 = 1, this parameter is not used,


and a value of 0% is passed to the Id limiter.

105 Id Negative Current Limit


[Id Neg Limit]

This parameter determines the minimum value for


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default -40.0
the Id Reference (P93). The value of this Minimum Value -40.0
parameter is passed to the Id limiter.
Maximum Value 0
Related Parameters P93, P104

106 Id Current Feedback


[Id Feedback]

This parameter displays the calculated Id


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
feedback. Minimum Value -60.0
The value of this parameter is used with P100 (Iq Maximum Value 60.0
Feedback) and P11 (Rated AC Line Current) to Related Parameters P93, P100, P108
calculate the Total Line Current (P108).
The value is also used (with P100) to trigger
the wire overload (I2t) indicators (P34 and P183).

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-24 Programming Parameters

107 DC Bus Current


[DC Bus Current]

This parameter displays the DC bus current,


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Amps
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
calculated by the Real Power (P151) and the Minimum Value 0.0
Scaled Bus Feedback (P143).
Maximum Value 3276.7
Related Parameters P143, P151

108 Total Line Current


[Iac Total]

This parameter displays the total AC line current,


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Amps
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
calculated from the Iq Feedback (P100), the Minimum Value -3276.7
Rated AC Line Current (P11), and the Id
Feedback (P106). Maximum Value 3276.7
Related Parameters P11, P100, P106

109 Notch Filter Freq for Iq Cmd


[Iq Cmd FIR Freq]
Frequency for FIR notch filter applied to value of Iq
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
Hertz
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
current command (P94). Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 500
Related Parameters P94

110-114 P110-P114 are for internal use only.

115 Voltage Loop PI Error Limit


[PI Error Limit]

This parameter is used to determine when the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default -34
error limiter will activate. Minimum Value -100
When the value of the Voltage Loop Error (P142) Maximum Value -4
exceeds the value defined by this parameter, Related Parameters P35, P116, P117, P142
and when P35 bit 1 = 1 (the Err Limiter bit is
enabled in the Host Mode parameter), then the
error limiter will be activated to provide the
additional error correction needed. P115
Set this parameter to the desired error value Err
for activating the error limiter.
P117
P116

116 Voltage Loop Error Limit Step


[PI Err Lim Step]

This parameter determines the step used by the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 1000/40960
Factory Default 0.0
error limiter. Minimum Value -80.0
The P115 listing describes what the error limiter Maximum Value 0.0
does, and how it is activated. Related Parameters P115, P117

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-25

117 Voltage Loop Error Limit Gain


[PI Err Lim Gain]

This parameter specifies the gain to be applied in


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 8
Factory Default 12.00
the PI error limiter. Minimum Value 0.00
The P115 listing describes what the error limiter Maximum Value 4096
does, and how it is activated. Related Parameters P115, P116

118 Voltage Loop Proportional Gain


[Iq Kp Gain]

This parameter specifies the proportional gain that


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 8
Factory Default 15.00 (adjusted by RGU)
is applied to the Voltage Loop Error (P142). Minimum Value 0.00
The proportional (Kp) gain is adjusted to respond
to a change in load. Maximum Value 8100
Related Parameters P119, P121, P142
The value of this parameter is adjusted by
the RGU. See P121 for more details.

119 Voltage Loop Integral Gain


[Iq Ki Gain]

This parameter specifies the integral gain that is


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 8
Factory Default 1500.00 (adjusted by RGU)
applied to the Voltage Loop Error (P142). The Minimum Value 0.00
integral gain is adjusted to remove any steady
state instabilities. After the gain from this Maximum Value 8100
parameter is applied to P142, the result is stored Related Parameters P118, P120, P121, P142
in P120.

The value of this parameter is adjusted by


the RGU.

120 Voltage Loop Integrator Output


[Iq Integ Output]

This parameter displays the integral error


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
command, which is calculated from the Voltage Minimum Value -640.0
Loop Integral Gain (P119) and the Voltage Loop
Error (P142). Maximum Value 640.0
Related Parameters P119, P121
The value of this parameter, which is displayed
as a percentage of P11 (Rated AC Line Current),
is used to determine the Voltage Loop PI Output
(P121). The listing for P121 shows how this
parameter is used in the PI regulator.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-26 Programming Parameters

121 Voltage Loop PI Output


[PI Reg Out]

This parameter stores the output from the PI


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of P11
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 0.0
regulator. When the P90 (Iq Mode) equals 0 or 1, Minimum Value -640.0
this value is passed through the current limiter to
determine the Iq Reference (P96). Maximum Value 640.0
Related Parameters P90, P96, P118, P119, P120
The diagram shows how the PI regulator is P115 P116 P117 PI Regulator
arranged, and shows how the value for P121 is w/ Error Limiter
determined.

See the P90 listing for more information about Error Limiter

this parameter.
P118
Voltage Loop
Proportional
Gain
+
P142 P121 P94
Voltage
Loop Error
Prop
Gain + Voltage
Loop PI
Iq
Reference
+ Output

P119
Voltage Loop
Integral Gain

P120
Integral Voltage Loop
Gain Integrator
Output

122 Auxiliary Voltage Command


[Aux Volt Cmd]

This parameter defines an auxiliary voltage that


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0
can be commanded for the DC bus. The value Minimum Value -1.15 x P16
entered into this parameter can be used to
command a specific bus voltage (when P123 = 1) Maximum Value 1.15 x P16
or can be used to add to the Bus Voltage Related Parameters P123, P126, P207
Command in P207 (when P123 = 2).
To use this parameter as an auxiliary bus voltage, To use this parameter as a supplement to the
enter the bus voltage that is needed during Bus Voltage Command (P207) during particular
particular events then program P123 to equal 1 events, enter the bus voltage to be added to P207
during those events. and program P123 to equal 2 during those events.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-27

123 Voltage Mode Select


[Volt Mode Sel]

This parameter selects the source voltage


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 3
command used to produce the Bus Reference Minimum Value 0
(P128), which determines the voltage that the
RGU should supply to the bus. Maximum Value 3
Related Parameters P122, P126, P128, P129, P207
P 10 P 14 P 16

Value Description P129 0 Bus Volt Cmd


R e f L im it Bus
3
0 Bus Volt Cmd Selects the P207 (Bus Voltage C a lcula to r Reference
1 Aux Volt Cmd
Automatic 2 Bus&Aux Cmd
Command) as the input. By default, 2
P207 is set to the Nominal DC Bus
P 130 +
? 3 Bus Ref Auto

Voltage (P16). P122


+
1
Auxiliary
1 Aux Volt Cmd Selects the value entered into P122 Voltage
(Auxiliary Voltage Command). Command
P207 0 P124/P125 P126
Bus Min/Max Bus Rate
2 Bus&Aux Cmd Selects the sum of P207 and P122. Voltage Bus Reference B us R a te
Command Reference L im ite r
3 Bus Ref Auto Selects the bus reference calculated
P123
from P10, P14, P16, and P130. Voltage
Mode
Select

The bus rate limiter shown is used to limit limit the bus
reference from changing to rapidly. The output of this
limiter is the Bus Reference (P128).

124 Minimum Bus Reference


[Min Bus Ref]

This parameter defines the minimum voltage


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0.85 x P16
command value that can be sent as a Bus Minimum Value 0.85 x P16
Reference (P128).
Maximum Value 1.15 x P16
This value is calculated by the RGU and is 95% Related Parameters P125, P126, P128, P129
of the greater of either the Nominal AC Line
Voltage (P10) multiplied by the square root of two,
or the Actual AC Line Volage (P14) multiplied by
the square root of two.

125 Maximum Bus Reference


[Max Bus Ref]
This parameter defines the maximum voltage
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 1.13 x P16
command value that can be sent as a Bus Minimum Value 0.85 x P16
Reference (P128).
Maximum Value 1.15 x P16
This value is calculated by the RGU and is equal Related Parameters P124, P126, P128, P129
to 115% of the Nominal AC Line Voltage (P10)
multiplied by the square root of two.

126 Bus Rate Reference


[Bus Rate Ref]

This parameter specifies the bus voltage to be


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0.0
achieved. The value of this parameter is passed Minimum Value 0.85 x P16
through the bus rate limiter to ensure that the DC
bus voltage does not change too rapidly, resulting Maximum Value 1.15 x P16
in the value for P128 (Bus Reference). Related Parameters P122, P123, P124, P125, P129, P127, P128

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-28 Programming Parameters

127 Bus Reference Change Rate


[Ref Change Rate]

This parameter specifies the maximum increase


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P16
Display Units * 4096/100
Factory Default 0.24
or decrease allowed in the Bus Rate Reference Minimum Value 0.00
(P126) per 5ms.
Maximum Value 280.00
The bus rate limiter uses this value to produce the Related Parameters P126, P128
rate limited Bus Reference (P128).

128 Bus Reference


[Bus Reference]

This parameter indicates the voltage that needs to


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P16
Display Units * 4096/100
Factory Default 0.49
be supplied to the DC bus. Minimum Value 0.00
The RGU compares the voltage needed by the DC Maximum Value 280.00
bus (P128) with the Bus Feedback (P141). The Related Parameters P126, P128
difference (P128-P141) signifies the Bus
Error (P142). The PI regulator determines the
gain required, and an Iq Reference (P96) directs
the RGU to supply the required voltage.

129 Bus Reference Automatic


[Bus Ref Auto]

This parameter sends the calculated bus voltage


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0.85 x P16
that needs to be supplied to the DC bus. Minimum Value 0.85 x P16
This value is determined by a function of the Maximum Value 1.15 x P16
measured AC voltage and the nominal AC and DC Related Parameters P123, P128, P130
voltages (P10, P14, P16).

This parameter is the default input used for the


Bus Reference (P128), which is selected by the
Voltage Mode Selector (P123).

130 Automatic Bus Reference Tracking


[AutoRef Tracking]

This parameter specifies the percentage over (or


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of (P14 x sqrt(2))
Display Units * 5793/100
Factory Default 4.2
under) the calculated nominal DC bus voltage Minimum Value -5.0
(P14 x sqrt(2)) to be commanded through the Bus
Reference Automatic (P129). Maximum Value 10.0
Related Parameters P14, P123, P129
For example, if an RGU is supplied with 460V AC, the
calculated nominal DC bus voltage would be 650V
(460V x sqrt(2)). The bus reference calculator would
multiply this 650V x P130 (4.2% ,default) resulting in
27V DC, which would be added to the calculated
Nominal DC Bus Voltage and be stored in P129
(Automatic Bus Reference), which would command
that the DC bus be supplied with 683V DC.

131-136 P131-P136 are for internal use only.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-29

137 Wn, Bus Feedback Filter Bandwidth


[Leadlag Freq, Wn]

This parameter specifies bandwidth for the bus


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
R/S (rad/sec)
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1000
feedback filter. This filters the feedback using the Minimum Value 0
following formula:
Maximum Value 32767
P138
256
x P140 x P137 Related Parameters P138, P140, P141
P140 + P137

138 Kn, Bus Feedback Filter Gain


[Leadlag Gain, Kn]

This parameter specifies gain for the bus feedback


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.63
filter. This filters the feedback using the formula Minimum Value 0.00
listed in P137.
Maximum Value 5.00
Related Parameters P137, P140, P141

139 Bus Voltage Input Select


[Volt Mode Sel]

This parameter selects the input used for the bus


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
voltage feedback. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 2
Related Parameters P38, P60, P61, P143
Value Description
0 DSP Averaged Selects P61 (DSP Average Bus Voltage) as the input used for the Scaled Bus Feedback (P143).
1 DSP Channel Selects P60 (DSP DC Bus Voltage) as the input used for the Scaled Bus Feedback (P143).
2 Host Channel Selects P38 (A/D Converter 2 Input) as the input used for the Scaled Bus Feedback (P143). P38 provides a sample
from the DC bus.

140 Bus Prefiltered Feedback


[Bus Prefil Fbk]

This parameter displays the bus feedback value


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read Only)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0
before it is filtered (by the formula shown in the Minimum Value 0
P138 listing) and passed to P141 (Bus Feedback).
Maximum Value 1.5 x P16
Related Parameters P137, P138, P141, P143, P218, P219
P219 (Feedback Select) can select feedback P143
from the DC bus (P143), or can select a Scaled Bus
Feedback
simulated feedback (P218) as the input for
this parameter. P137 P138
P215 P138 P141
P218 x P140 x P137
256
Simulated Bus
P216 P140 + P137
Bus Feedback
Simulator Feedback Filter
P217
P96 P219
Feedback
Select

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-30 Programming Parameters

141 Bus Feedback


[Bus Feedback]

This parameter displays the value of the bus


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read Only)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0
feedback. This bus feedback value is compared Minimum Value 0
with the Bus Reference (P128) to determine the
bus error (P142) which needs to be corrected by Maximum Value 1.5 x P16
the PI regulator. Related Parameters P128, P140, P142

P128
Bus
Reference
+ P142

Voltage
Loop Error
PI Regulator
P141 _
Bus
Feedback

142 Voltage Loop Error


[Bus Error]

This parameter shows the error in the DC bus that


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read Only)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0
needs to be corrected through the PI regulator. Minimum Value 0
This value is used to adjust the bus voltage
(shown by the Bus Feedback (P141)) to the Maximum Value 1.5 x P16
commanded voltage (shown by the Bus Related Parameters P128, P140, P142
Reference (P128)).

143 Scaled Bus Feedback


[Scaled Bus Fbk]

This parameter shows the calibrated bus


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0
feedback. The value of this parameter is used to Minimum Value 0
determine the Bus Feedback (P141) and is used
to calculate the DC Bus Current (P107). Maximum Value 1.5 x P16
Related Parameters P38, P60, P61, P144

144 Bus Voltage Feedback Calibration


[Bus Volt Cal]

This parameter is used to adjust the voltage value


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P143
Display Units * 1125/1000
Factory Default 0.0
shown in the bus feedback parameters (i.e. P140, Minimum Value -3.1
P141, P143).
Maximum Value 3.1
To calibrate the feedback, adjust this parameter Related Parameters P141, P143
until P143 (Scaled Bus Feedback) is equal to the
voltage of the DC bus (use a voltmeter). This
parameter can only be set when the RGU is
Disabled.

145 Positive DC Bus to Ground Voltage


[+Bus Volt to Gnd]

This parameter indicates the voltage between the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0
positive DC bus and the ground (PE). Minimum Value 0
P40 (A/D Converter 4 Input) supplies the raw data Maximum Value 1.15 x P16
for this parameter. Related Parameters P40, P146

146 Negative DC Bus to Ground Voltage


[-Bus Volt to Gnd]

This parameter indicates the voltage between the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0
negative DC bus and the ground (PE). Minimum Value 0
P39 (A/D Converter 3 Input) supplies the raw data Maximum Value 1.15 x P16
for this parameter. Related Parameters P39, P145

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-31

147 Single Phase Detection Threshold


[1 Phase Threshold]

This parameter sets the threshold that a single


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 400
phase trip will occur. The Single Phase Detector Minimum Value 100
monitors the internal Phase Lock Loop (PLL) error
signal. Maximum Value 1000
Related Parameters P148
A single phase trip occurs when the PLL error
exceeds the threshold set by P147 for a time
duration set by P148.

148 Single Phase Detection Delay Before Fault


[1 Phase Err Delay]

Time delay between detection of single phase


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
SEL
Display Units * 200
Factory Default 3.0
operation and the declaration of a fault. Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 60
Related Parameters P147

149-150 P149-P150 are for internal use only.

151 Real Power


[Real Power]

This parameter indicates the real power being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
kW
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
supplied through the DC bus. Minimum Value -3276.8
This value is calculated using the AC line voltage Maximum Value 3276.7
(P14) and the active AC current Related Parameters P11, P14, P100
(P100 x P11).
For example, if a K-code RGU has a 380V AC
line voltage in P14, and if P100 indicates that
the active current is 97% of the rated line
voltage (182A AC), then P151 would equal 67kW
(380 x 0.97 x 182 = 67kW).

152 Reactive Power


[Reactive Power]

This parameter indicates the reactive power being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
kVAR
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
supplied through the DC bus. Minimum Value -3276.8
This value is calculated using the AC line voltage Maximum Value 3276.7
(P14) and the reactive current Related Parameters P11, P14, P106
(P106 x P11).

153 Apparent Power


[Apparent Power]

This parameter indicates the apparent power


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
kVA
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
being supplied through the DC bus. Minimum Value 0.0
This value is calculated using the Real Power Maximum Value 6553.5
(P151) and the Reactive Power (P152). Related Parameters P151, P152

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-32 Programming Parameters

154 Power Factor


[Power Factor]

This parameter indicates the power factor as a


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
% of Unity
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 100.0
percent of unity. Minimum Value -100.0
Maximum Value 100.0
Related Parameters P14, P100, P106, P151, P152

155 kW Hours
[kW Hours]

This parameter indicates the kW hours of power


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
consumed by the RGU. Minimum Value -3276.8
P32 bit 2 can be selected to reset the meter (see Maximum Value 3276.7
P161 for details). Related Parameters P32, P158, P161

156 kVA Hours


[kVA Hours]

This parameter indicates the kVA hours of power


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
consumed by the RGU. Minimum Value -3276.8
P32 bit 2 can be selected to reset the meter (see Maximum Value 3276.7
P161 for details). Related Parameters P32, P159, P161

157 kVAR Hours


[kVAR Hours]

This parameter indicates the kVAR hours of power


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
consumed by the RGU. Minimum Value -3276.8
P32 bit 2 can be selected to reset the meter (see Maximum Value 3276.7
P161 for details). Related Parameters P32, P160, P161

158 MW Hours
[MW Hours]

This parameter indicates the MW hours of power


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
consumed by the RGU. Minimum Value -32768
P32 bit 2 can be selected to reset the meter (see Maximum Value 32767
P161 for details). Related Parameters P32, P155, P161

159 MVA Hours


[MVA Hours]

This parameter indicates the MVA hours of power


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
consumed by the RGU. Minimum Value -32768
P32 bit 2 can be selected to reset the meter (see Maximum Value 32767
P161 for details). Related Parameters P32, P156, P161

160 MVAR Hours


[MVAR Hours]

This parameter indicates the MVAR hours of


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.0
power consumed by the RGU. Minimum Value -32768
P32 bit 2 can be selected to reset the meter (see Maximum Value 32767
P161 for details). Related Parameters P32, P157, P161

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-33

161 Meter Reset Hour


[Meter Reset Hour]

This parameter defines the hour when the power


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
consumption meter should reset Minimum Value 0
(P32 bit 2 must be set (not default)).
Maximum Value 23
For example, to have the meter automatically Related Parameters P32, P162, P163, P164, P165
reset on December 31st, 1998 at 11:59pm,
P32 bit 2 would need to be set to 1, and the
meter reset parameters would need to be set 11:59 pm 12 / 31 / 98
as shown in the diagram.
23 59 12 31 98

P161 P162 P163 P164 P165


Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
Reset Hour Reset Reset Reset Day Reset Year
Minute Month

162 Meter Reset Minute


[Meter Reset Minute]

This parameter defines the minute when the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
power consumption meter should reset Minimum Value 0
(P32 bit 2 must be set (not default)).
Maximum Value 59
See P161 for details. Related Parameters P32, P161, P163, P164, P165

163 Meter Reset Month


[Meter Reset Month]

This parameter defines the month when the power


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1
consumption meter should reset Minimum Value 1
(P32 bit 2 must be set (not default)).
Maximum Value 12
See P161 for details. Related Parameters P32, P161, P162, P164, P165

164 Meter Reset Day


[Meter Reset Day]
This parameter defines the day when the power
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1
consumption meter should reset (P32 bit 2 must Minimum Value 1
be set (not default)).
Maximum Value 31
See P161 for details. Related Parameters P32, P161, P162, P163, P165

165 Meter Reset Year


[Meter Reset Year]

This parameter defines the year when the power


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
consumption meter should reset (P32 bit 2 must Minimum Value 0
be set (not default)).
Maximum Value 99
See P161 for details. Related Parameters P32, P161, P162, P163, P164

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-34 Programming Parameters

166-173 P166-P173 are for internal use only.

174 Host Fault Status Word 1


[Fault Status 1]

This parameter indicates a number of host fault


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
conditions. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - Fault 0 - No Fault Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P175, P176
P175 and P176 determine what conditions are Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
reported and how the conditions are to be 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
handled (warning/fault).
Bit Description
0 ROM Bad CRC Indicates that a ROM fault has been detected.
1 RAM Error Indicates a fault in the RAM.
2 BatRAM Err Indicates a fault in the battery-backed RAM.
3 DSP Load Indicates a DSP loading fault.
4 FPGA Load Indicates an FPGA loading fault.
5 Iq Foldback Indicates an Iq foldback fault.
6 M1 Open Indicates that the M1 contactor has opened (P9).
7 SCANport Err Indicates an error in the SCANport.
8 R2R HW Error Indicates an error in the RGU-to-RGU hardware.
9 Control Volt Indicates a control voltage fault.
10 H/S Overtemp Indicates that the heatsink temperature (P87) has exceeded maximum.
11 Bus Low Indicates that the DC bus voltage has fallen below the DC Bus Low Setting (P28).
12 Bus High Indicates that the DC bus voltage has risen above the DC Bus High Setting (P29).
13 BRAM Chksum Indicates a parity error in the battery-backed RAM.
14 Prchrg Fail Indicates that the precharge operation has failed.
15 DSP Timeout Indicates that the DSP has timed out.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-35

175 Fault Status 1 Report Mask


[Flt Report Mask 1]

This parameter selects the faults that can be


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1111 1111 1111 1111
reported to P174. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - Report 0 - Suppress Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P174, P176
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description Bit Description


0* ROM Bad CRC Reports ROM errors. 8* R2R HW Error Reports errors in the RGU-to-RGU hardware.
1* RAM Error Reports RAM errors. 9 Control Volt Reports control voltage faults.
2* BatRAM Err Reports errors in the battery-backed RAM. 10* H/S Overtemp Reports when the heatsink is at overtemperature.
3* DSP Load Reports DSP loading faults. 11 Bus Low Reports when the DC bus falls below min voltage.
4* FPGA Load Reports FPGA loading faults. 12 Bus High Reports when the DC bus rises above max voltage.
5 Iq Foldback Reports Iq foldback faults. 13 BRAM Chksum Reports parity errors in the battery-backed RAM.
6* M1 Open Reports when the M1 contactor opens. 14* Prchrg Fail Reports when the precharge operation fails.
7 SCANport Err Reports SCANport errors. 15* DSP Timeout Reports when the DSP times out.
* These items cannot be changed to zero.

176 Fault/Warning Select Mask 1


[Fault/Warn Mask1]

This parameter determines whether conditions


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1100 0101 0101 1111
should be reported as a warning (0) or handled as Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
a fault (1).
Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
The factory default, for example, shows that a Related Parameters P174, P176
heatsink overtemperature causes a fault
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
(bit 10 = 1) and a low bus voltage produces a 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
warning (bit 11 = 0).
Bit Description Bit Description
0* ROM Bad CRC Selects response to ROM error. 8* R2R HW Error Selects response to RGU-to-RGU hardware error.
1* RAM Error Selects response to RAM error. 9 Control Volt Selects response to a control voltage condition.
2* BatRAM Err Selects response battery-backed RAM error. 10* H/S Overtemp Selects response to heatsink overtemperature.
3* DSP Load Selects response to DSP loading condition. 11 Bus Low Selects response to low bus voltage (P28).
4* FPGA Load Selects response to an FPGA loading condition. 12 Bus High Selects response to high bus voltage (P29).
5 Iq Foldback Selects response to an Iq foldback error. 13 BRAM Chksum Selects response to parity error in BRAM.
6* M1 Open Selects response to the M1 contactor opening. 14* Prchrg Fail Selects response to precharge failure.
7 SCANport Err Selects response to SCANport errors. 15* DSP Timeout Selects response to a DSP timeout.
* These items cannot be changed to zero.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-36 Programming Parameters

177 Host Fault Status Word 2


[Fault Status 2]

This parameter indicates a number of host fault


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
conditions. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - Fault 0 - No Fault Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P178, P179
P178 and P179 determine what conditions are Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
reported and how the conditions are to be 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
handled (warning/fault).
Bit Description
0 Desaturizatn Indicates a desaturization fault.
1 Board Intlk Indicates a board interlock condition.
2 HW Bus OverV Indicates that the bus is operating at overvoltage (hardware).
3 HW Line I Indicates a fault in the line current (hardware).
4 Zero Seq Err Indicates an zero sequnce error.
5 Phase Lock L Indicates an error in the phase lock loop.
6 Phase Loss Indicates a phase has been lost from the AC line.
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 SW Line I Indicates a fault in the line current (software).
11 I Offset Err Indicates a current offset fault.
12 DualPort TO Indicates an error in the dual port time out.
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 DSP Fault Indicates a fault in the DSP.

178 Fault Status 2 Report Mask


[Flt Report Mask 2]

This parameter selects the faults that can be


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1111 1111 1111 1111
reported to P177. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - Report 0 - Suppress Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P177, P179
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description Bit Description


0* Desaturizatn Reports desaturization errors. 8 Not Used
1* Board Intlk Reports board interlock errors. 9 Not Used
2* HW Bus OverV Reports bus overvoltage conditions (hardware). 10* SW Line I Reports line current conditions (software)
3* HW Line I Reports line current conditions (hardware). 11* I Offset Err Reports current offset errors.
4* Zero Seq Err Reports zero sequence errors. 12* DualPort TO Reports errors in the dual port time out.
5* Phase Lock L Reports phase lock loop. 13 Not Used
6* Phase Loss Reports phase losses in the AC line. 14 Not Used
7 Not Used 15* DSP Fault Reports DSP faults.
* These items cannot be changed to zero.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-37

179 Fault/Warning Select Mask 2


[Fault/Warn Mask2]

This parameter determines whether conditions


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1001 1100 0111 1111
should be reported as a warning (0) or handled as Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
a fault (1).
Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
The factory default, for example, shows that Related Parameters P174, P176
all the usable bits cause faults.
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description Bit Description


0* Desaturizatn Selects response to desaturization condition. 8 Not Used
1* Board Intlk Selects response to a board interlock condition. 9 Not Used
2* HW Bus OverV Selects response to bus overvoltage (hardware). 10* SW Line I Selects response to line current condition (software).
3* HW Line I Selects response to current condtn (hardware). 11* I Offset Err Selects response to current offset error.
4* Zero Seq Err Selects response to zero sequence error. 12* DualPort TO Selects response to dual port timeout.
5* Phase Lock L Selects response to phase lock loop condition. 13 Not Used
6* Phase Loss Selects response to phase loss in AC line. 14 Not Used
7 Not Used 15* DSP Fault Selects response to DSP fault.
* These items cannot be changed to zero.

180 Host Fault Status Word 3


[Fault Status 3]

This parameter indicates a number of host fault


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
conditions. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - Fault 0 - No Fault Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P181, P182
P181 and P182 determine what conditions are Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
reported and how the conditions are to be 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
handled (warning/fault).
Bit Description
0 Clock Loss Indicates that a reset has occurred due to loss of oscillator.
1 Double Bus Indicates a memory access error.
2 Watchdog Indicates a expiration fault in the watchdog timer.
3 En at Pwr Up Indicates that the RGU was Enabled at power up.
4 Battery Low Indicates that the battery for the battery-backed memory is low.
5 TIO Loss Indicates that the primary control loop clock has been lost.
6 R2R Dup Addr Indicates that more than one RGU (in a parallel application) have the same R2R transmit address (P267).
7 Lost Master Indicates that communication to the master has been lost.
8 DPRAM Error Indicates a fault in the dual port between the host and DSP.
9 No Vloop Tic Indicates that the voltage loop clock has been lost.
10 No Fast Task Indicates that high speed control tasks have stopped.
11 No Bgnd Task Indicates that background tasks are not executing.
12 Addr Bus Err Indicates an error in the address bus.
13 Data Bus Err Indicates an error in the data bus.
14 Line Low Indicates that the AC line voltage has dropped below the AC Line Low Setting (P26).
15 Line High Indicates that the AC line voltage has exceeded the AC Line High Setting (P27).

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-38 Programming Parameters

181 Fault Status 3 Report Mask


[Flt Report Mask 3]

This parameter selects the faults that can be


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1111 1111 1111 1111
reported to P180. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - Report 0 - Suppress Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P180, P181
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description Bit Description


0 Clock Loss Reports when the oscillator clock is lost. 8* DPRAM Error Reports errors in the DPRAM.
1 Double Bus Reports memory access errors. 9 No Vloop Tic Reports when the voltage loop clock is lost.
2 Watchdog Reports when the watchdog timer is expired. 10* No Fast Task Reports when high speed tasks are not executing.
3 En at Pwr Up Reports when the RGU is Enabled at power up. 11* No Bgnd Task Reports when background tasks are not running.
4 Battery Low Reports when the BRAM battery is low. 12* Addr Bus Err Reports address bus errors.
5* TIO Loss Reports when the primary clock is lost. 13* Data Bus Err Reports data bus errors.
6* R2R Dup Addr Reports when RGUs have an address conflict. 14 Line Low Reports when the AC line voltage falls below P26.
7* Lost Master Reports when Master communication is lost. 15 Line High Reports when the AC line voltage exceeds P27.
* These items cannot be changed to zero.

182 Fault/Warning Select Mask 3


[Fault/Warn Mask3]

This parameter determines whether conditions


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0011 1101 1110 1000
should be reported as a warning (0) or handled as Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
a fault (1).
Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P180, P181
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description Bit Description


0 Clock Loss Selects response to a lost clock. 8* DPRAM Error Selects response to DPRAM errors.
1 Double Bus Selects response to memory access errors. 9 No Vloop Tic Selects response to voltage loop timer errors.
2 Watchdog Selects response to watchdog timer expiration. 10* No Fast Task Selects response to fast task lockup.
3 En at Pwr Up Selects response when RGU Enables at pwr up. 11* No Bgnd Task Selects response to background task lockup.
4 Battery Low Selects response to low BRAM battery voltage. 12* Addr Bus Err Selects response to address bus errors.
5* TIO Loss Selects response to primary clock being lost. 13* Data Bus Err Selects response to data bus errors.
6* R2R Dup Addr Selects response to duplicate address errors. 14 Line Low Selects response to low voltage in the AC line.
7* Lost Master Selects response to losing the Master. 15 Line High Selects response to high voltage in the AC line.
* These items cannot be changed to zero.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-39

183 Host Fault Status Word 4


[Fault Status 4]

This parameter indicates a number of host fault


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
conditions. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - Fault 0 - No Fault Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P184, P185
P184 and P185 determine what conditions are Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
reported and how the conditions are to be 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
handled (warning/fault).
Bit Description
0 I2t Warnings Indicates that a warning has been detected by the I2t wire overload protect circuit.
1 I2t Overload Indicates that an overload condition has been detected by the I2t wire overload protect circuit.
2 H/S HighTemp Indicates that the RGU heatsink temperature is high (P87).
3 Reset Reqd Indicates that the RGU must be reset (P32).
4 NTC Open Indicates an NTC open condition.
5 NTC Short Indicates an NTC short condition.
6 MSTR Faulted Indicates that the master RGU is faulted (see P20).
7 1 Phase Warn Indicates single phase condition has been detected (see P147).
8 1 Phase Err Indicates single phase condition has persisted beyond time limit (see P148).
9-15 Not Used

184 Fault Status 4 Report Mask


[Flt Report Mask 4]

This parameter selects the faults that can be


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1111 1111 1111 1111
reported to P180. Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - Report 0 - Suppress Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P183, P185
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description
0 I2t Warnings Reports warnings from the I2t wire overload protector.
1* I2t Overload Reports overload conditions from the I2t wire overload protector.
2 H/S HighTemp Reports high heatink temperatures (P87).
3* Reset Reqd Reports when a reset is required (P32).
4 NTC Open Reports NTC open condition.
5 NTC Short Reports NTC short condition.
6* MSTR Faulted Reports when the master RGU is faulted (P20).
7 1 Phase Warn Reports single phase condition has been detected (see P147).
8 1 Phase Err Reports single phase condition has persisted beyond time limit (see P148).
9-15 Not Used
* These items cannot be changed to zero.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-40 Programming Parameters

185 Fault/Warning Select Mask 4


[Fault/Warn Mask4]

This parameter determines whether conditions


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0001 0111 1010
should be reported as a warning (0) or handled as Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
a fault (1).
Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111
Related Parameters P183, P184
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Description
0 I2t Warnings Selects response to warnings detected by the I2t wire overload protect circuit.
1* I2t Overload Selects response to overload conditions detected by the I2t wire overload protect circuit.
2 H/S HighTemp Selects response when the RGU heatsink temperature is high (P87).
3* Reset Reqd Selects response to reset required conditions (P32).
4 NTC Open Selects response to NTC open condition.
5 NTC Short Selects response to NTC short condition.
6* MSTR Faulted Selects response when the master RGU faults (see P20).
7 1 Phase Warn Selects response when single phase condition has been detected (see P147).
8 1 Phase Err Selects response when single phase condition has persisted beyond time limit (see P148).
9-15 Not Used
* These items cannot be changed to zero.

186-188 P186-P188 are for internal use only.

189 Auxiliary Relay Source


[Aux Relay Ind]

This parameter specifies the source to be used in


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 33 (Host Status Word 1)
the logic operation shown in P191. This source Minimum Value 0 (disabled)
parameter will be masked with the value in P190
to determine if the auxiliary relay will change state. Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
Related Parameters P190, P191, P192

190 Auxiliary Relay Mask


[Aux Relay Mask]
This parameter defines the mask to be applied to
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1
the value of the Auxiliary Relay Source parameter Minimum Value 0
(P189).
Maximum Value 65535
Press F3 to change the parameter display to Related Parameters P189, P191, P192
binary, hexadecimal, etc.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-41

191 Auxiliary Relay Logic Select


[Aux Relay Select]

This parameter selects the logical operation to be


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 8
performed between the parameter specified in Minimum Value 0
P189 and the value of P190. If the result of the
operation is true, then the relay energizes. Maximum Value 11
Related Parameters P189, P190, P192
By default, P189 is set to read the contents of Pxxx P191
P33 (Host Status Word 1); P190 is set to 1; and Auxiliary
P191 is set to 8 (NAND). This arrangement Source
Parameter
Relay Logic
Select
energizes the relay coil when the hard fault bit
Logical Operator
(P33 bit 0) is not set.
P189 P190
The NO contacts of this relay are connected to Auxiliary Pxxx [operator] P190 Auxiliary
Relay Relay Mask
the 120V AC fault circuitry in the RGU. Source

Value Description (Pxxx refers to the source parameter defined in P189)


0 OPENRelay always open.
1 CLOSERelay always closed.
2 NERelay triggers when Pxxx is not equal to P190.
3 LTRelay triggers when Pxxx is less than P190.
1 2 3 4
4 GTRelay triggers when Pxxx is greater than P190.
TB6
5 EQRelay triggers when Pxxx is equal to P190.

Not Used
6 XNORRelay triggers when Pxxx XNOR P190 is true.

Auxiliary Control (Com)

Auxiliary Control (NC)

Auxiliary Control (NO)


7 NORRelay triggers when Pxxx NOR P190 is true.
8 NANDRelay triggers when Pxxx NAND P190 is true.
9 XORRelay triggers when Pxxx XOR P190 is true.
10 ORRelay triggers when Pxxx OR P190 is true.
11 ANDRelay triggers when Pxxx AND P190 is true.

192 Auxiliary Relay Hysteresis


[Aux Relay Hyst]

This parameter defines the variance allowed after


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 1
an event is activated before the event is Minimum Value 0
deactivated.
Maximum Value 65535
For the example in P191, the auxiliary relay will Related Parameters P189, P190, P191
be closed when the RGU line voltage is 450V AC
or less. If we want the relay to remain closed up
to a 458V AC line voltage, we could enter 8 into
P192, and the relay would remain closed until
P14 indicates a value over 458V.

193-197 P193-P197 are for internal use only.

198 Current Loop Bandwidth


[DSP Bandwidth]

This parameter defines the bandwidth used in the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
rad/s
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 800 (for 2kHz), 1200 (for 4kHz)
current loop. Minimum Value 300
Maximum Value 2000
Related Parameters P199

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-42 Programming Parameters

199 Current Loop Damping


[DSP Damping]

This parameter defines the damping used in the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
%
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 100
current loop. Minimum Value 50
Maximum Value 200
Related Parameters P198

200 Iq Reference Rate Limit


[Iq Change Rate]

This parameter defines the rate limit for the Iq


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
% of P11
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 33.33
reference. This value is used by the current limiter Minimum Value 2.44
to prevent the Iq Reference (P96) from changing
too rapidly. Maximum Value 366.21
Related Parameters P198
For example, a 575V AC M-code RGU, bydefault,
would not allow the Iq reference to change more than
200A (33.33% of 602A (P11)).

201 Per Unit Internal Capacitance Charge Rate


[Int Charge Rate]

This parameter indicates the charge rate of the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
msec
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 27
RGU internal capacitance. Minimum Value 0.00
To determine the rate, divide P16 (Nominal DC Maximum Value 1000
Bus Voltage) by this value. Related Parameters P202

202 Per Unit System Capacitance Charge Rate


[Sys Charge Rate]

This parameter indicates approximate charge rate


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
msec
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 32
for the system capacitance. Minimum Value 0.00
To determine the rate, divide P16 (Nominal DC Maximum Value 1000
Bus Voltage) by this value. Related Parameters P201

203 External Capacitance


[Ext Capacitance]

This parameter specifies the estimated sum


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
uF/10
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 9600
capacitace of the all the AC units connected to the Minimum Value 10
DC bus. This value is used to calculate the
proportional and integral gains in the PI regulator Maximum Value 65000
(P118 and P119). Related Parameters P202, P204
See Chapter/(Appendix) 8, (B)
See Appendix B for a listing of inverter capacitor
bank values.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-43

204 Internal Capacitance


[Int Capacitance]

This parameter specifies the internal capacitance


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read/Write)
uF/10
Display Units * 1
Factory Default See below
of the RGU (determined by the Frame Catalog Minimum Value 10
Number (P4)). P201 can be used to view the
charge rate of the internal capacitance. Maximum Value 3000
Related Parameters P201, P203
J-code RGUs K-code RGUs L-code RGUs M-code RGUs N-Code RGUs
Factory Default 645 (286*) Factory Default 1200 (600*) Factory Default 1500 Factory Default 2400 Factory Default 2400

* Value applies to units with 575V AC inputs

205 Voltage Loop Bandwidth


[Bus Voltage BW]

This parameter specifies the bandwidth of the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
rad/s
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 50.0
voltage loop. This value is used by the RGU to Minimum Value 5.00
calculate the proportional gain and integral gain in
the PI regulator (P118 and P119). Maximum Value 500.00
Related Parameters P206

206 Voltage Loop Damping


[Bus Volt Damping]

This parameter specifies the damping for the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
%
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 100.00
voltage loop. This value is used by RGU to Minimum Value 30.00
calculate the proportional gain and integral gain in
the PI regulator (P118 and P119). Maximum Value 500.00
Related Parameters P205

207 Bus Voltage Command


[Bus Volt Cmd]

This parameter can be used to specify a


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default P16
command for the DC bus voltage. Minimum Value 0.85 x P16
This parameter is used to determine the Bus Maximum Value 1.15 x P16
Reference (P128) when selected in the Voltage Related Parameters P122, P123, P128
Mode Select (P123 = 1 or 2, not default).

208-215 P208-P215 are for internal use only.

215 Simulator Rate


[Simulator Rate]

This parameter defines the rate to be applied to


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
%
Display Units * 4096/100
Factory Default 4.88
the bus simulator. Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 799.98
Related Parameters P216, P217, P218

216 Simulator Load


[Simulator Load]

This parameter defines the load to be applied to


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
%
Display Units * 5120/100
Factory Default 19.50
the bus simulator. Minimum Value -156.3
Maximum Value 156.3
Related Parameters P215, P217, P218

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-44 Programming Parameters

217 Simulator Per Unit Capacitance


[Sim Charge Rate]

This parameter defines the capacitance charge


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
msec
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 32
rate to be applied to the bus simulator. Minimum Value 20
Maximum Value 2000
Related Parameters P215, P216, P218

218 Simulated Bus Feedback


[Sim Bus Fdbk]

This parameter indicates the simulated bus


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0.00
feedback determined by P96 (Iq Reference), Minimum Value 0.00
P215, P216, and P217.
Maximum Value 1.15 x P16
This value can be used as the source for P141 Related Parameters P215, P216, P217, P219
(Bus Feedback) when P219 = 1 (not default).

219 Feedback Select


[Feedback Select]

This parameter selects the feedback source used


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Volt
Display Units * 4096/P16
Factory Default 0
for P141 (Bus Feedback). See P140. Minimum Value 0
Value Description Maximum Value 1
0 Bus Volt In Selects the bus feedback Related Parameters P215, P216, P217, P219
1 Bus Simulate Selects a simulated feedback

220-223 P220-P223 are for internal use only.

224 SCANport Port Enable Mask


[Port Enable Mask]

This parameter activates SCANport ports.


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0111 1111
SCANport 1 = J10 on main control board
Minimum Value 0000 0000
SCANport 2 = J9 on main control board Maximum Value 0111 1111
SCANport 6 = J8 on main control board Related Parameters P8, P225, P226, P227
Bit Description Bit Description
0 RGU I/OEnables the RGU I/O port 4 SCANport P:4Enables the port for SCANport 4
1 SCANport P:1Enables the port for SCANport 1 5 SCANport P:5Enables the port for SCANport 5
2 SCANport P:2Enables the port for SCANport 2 6 SCANport P:6Enables the port for SCANport 6
3 SCANport P:3Enables the port for SCANport 3 7 Not Used

225 SCANport Enable Mask


[Enable Mask]

This parameter allows a connected SCANport


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Bits
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0111 1111
device to enable the RGU. The selected ports Minimum Value 0000 0000
must be activated (P224).
Maximum Value 0111 1111
Related Parameters P8, P224, P226, P227
Bit Description Bit Description
0 RGU I/OEnables the RGU I/O 4 SCANport P:4Enables SCANport 4
1 SCANport P:1Enables SCANport 1 5 SCANport P:5Enables SCANport 5
2 SCANport P:2Enables SCANport 2 6 SCANport P:6Enables SCANport 6
3 SCANport P:3Enables SCANport 3 7 Not Used

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-45

226 SCANport Clear Fault Mask


[Clear Fault Mask]

This parameter allows a connected SCANport


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0111 1111
device to clear faults in the RGU. The selected Minimum Value 0000 0000
ports must be active (P224).
Maximum Value 0111 1111
Related Parameters P8, P224, P225, P227
Bit Description Bit Description
0 RGU I/OClears RGU I/O faults 4 SCANport P:4Clears SCANport 4 faults
1 SCANport P:1Clears SCANport 1 faults 5 SCANport P:5Clears SCANport 5 faults
2 SCANport P:2Clears SCANport 2 faults 6 SCANport P:6Clears SCANport 6 faults
3 SCANport P:3Clears SCANport 3 faults 7 Not Used

227 SCANport Reset Mask


[Reset Mask]

This parameter allows a connected SCANport


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0111 1111
device to reset the RGU. The selected ports must Minimum Value 0000 0000
be active (P224).
Maximum Value 0111 1111
Related Parameters P8, P224, P225, P226
Bit Description Bit Description
0 RGU I/OResets RGU I/O 4 SCANport P:4Resets SCANport 4
1 SCANport P:1Resets SCANport 1 5 SCANport P:5Resets SCANport 5
2 SCANport P:2Resets SCANport 2 6 SCANport P:6Resets SCANport 6
3 SCANport P:3Resets SCANport 3 7 Not Used

228,229 P228 and P229 are for internal use only.

230 SCANport Disable Owner


[Disable Owner]
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
Maximum Value 0000 0000 0111 1111
Related Parameters P231, P232
Bit Description Bit Description
0 RGU I/OIndicates that the RGU I/O port is disabled 4 SCANport P:4Indicates that the port for SCANport 4 is disabled
1 SCANport P:1Indicates that the port for SCANport 1 is disabled 5 SCANport P:5Indicates that the port for SCANport 5 is disabled
2 SCANport P:2Indicates that the port for SCANport 2 is disabled 6 SCANport P:6Indicates that the port for SCANport 6 is disabled
3 SCANport P:3Indicates that the port for SCANport 3 is disabled 7-15 Not Used

231 SCANport Enable Owner


[Enable Owner]
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
Maximum Value 0000 0000 0111 1111
Related Parameters P230, P232
Bit Description Bit Description
0 RGU I/OIndicates that the RGU I/O port is enabled 4 SCANport P:4Indicates that the port for SCANport 4 is enabled
1 SCANport P:1Indicates that the port for SCANport 1 is enabled 5 SCANport P:5Indicates that the port for SCANport 5 is enabled
2 SCANport P:2Indicates that the port for SCANport 2 is enabled 6 SCANport P:6Indicates that the port for SCANport 6 is enabled
3 SCANport P:3Indicates that the port for SCANport 3 is enabled 7-15 Not Used

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-46 Programming Parameters

232 SCANport Clear Fault Owner


[Clr Fault Owner]
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
Maximum Value 0000 0000 0111 1111
Related Parameters P230, P231
Bit Description Bit Description
0 RGU I/OIndicates a clear fault is issued to RGU I/O 4 SCANport P:4Indicates a clear fault is issued to SCANport 4
1 SCANport P:1Indicates a clear fault is issued to SCANport 1 5 SCANport P:5Indicates a clear fault is issued to SCANport 5
2 SCANport P:2Indicates a clear fault is issued to SCANport 2 6 SCANport P:6Indicates a clear fault is issued to SCANport 6
3 SCANport P:3Indicates a clear fault is issued to SCANport 3 7-15 Not Used

233, 234 P233 and P234 are for internal use only.

235 Type 1 Status


[Type 1 Status]
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
Maximum Value 0000 0000 1000 0001
Related Parameters P236
Bit Description
0 Enabled
1-6 Not Used
7 Faulted
8-15 Not Used

236 Type 2 Status


[Type 2 Status]
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0000 0000 0000 0000
Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000
Maximum Value 0000 0000 0000 0111
Related Parameters P236
Bit Description
0 Enabled
1 Warning
2 Faulted
3-15 Not Used

237,238 P237-P238 are for internal use only.

239 SCANport Remote Data In: P1


[Rem Data In:P1]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed into SCANport 1 (J10). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-47

240 SCANport Remote Data In: P2


[Rem Data In:P2]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed into SCANport 2 (J9). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

241 SCANport Remote Data In: P3


[Rem Data In:P3]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed into SCANport 3 (expansion port). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

242 SCANport Remote Data In: P4


[Rem Data In:P4]
This parameter shows the value that is being
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed into SCANport 4 (expansion port). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

243 SCANport Remote Data In: P5


[Rem Data In:P5]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed into SCANport 5 (expansion port). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

244 SCANport Remote Data In: P6


[Rem Data In:P6]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed into SCANport 6 (J7). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

245 SCANport Remote Data Out: P1


[Rem Data Out:P1]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed through SCANport 1 (J10). Minimum Value 0.00
To display a parameter value on the main HIM Maximum Value 65535
screen, link the desired parameter within P245. Related Parameters P224, P225
For example, linking P14 to P245 (Measured
AC Line Voltage) would cause a HIM connected
to J10 to display P14 on the main screen.

246 SCANport Remote Data Out: P2


[Rem Data Out:P2]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed out SCANport 2 (J9). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-48 Programming Parameters

247 SCANport Remote Data Out: P3


[Rem Data Out:P3]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed out SCANport 3 (expansion port). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

248 SCANport Remote Data Out: P4


[Rem Data Out:P4]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed out SCANport 4 (expansion port). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

249 SCANport Remote Data Out: P5


[Rem Data Out:P5]
This parameter shows the value that is being
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed out SCANport 5 (expansion port). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

250 SCANport Remote Data Out: P6


[Rem Data Out:P6]

This parameter shows the value that is being


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
passed out SCANport 6 (J7). Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P224, P225

251 SCANport Remote Data In: A1


[Rem Data In:A1]

This parameter shows the value of datalink A1


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being received from a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
This value may be used by linking other
parameters to this parameter. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P259

Receiving a SCANport Im age Using SCANport Rem ote Data In


RGU SCANport Device
RGU SCANport D evice
P251 (Data In A1) A1 Data Out
Pxxx P251
P252 (Data In A2) A2 Data Out
Destination SCANport Datalink A1 00101011101100
P253 (Data In B1) B1 Data O ut Param eter 1 Rem ote
P254 (Data In B2) B2 Data O ut (Link to P251) Data In: A1 A1 Data Out
P255 (Data In C1) C1 Data O ut
P256 (Data In C2) C2 Data O ut
P257 (Data In D 1) D1 D ata Out
P258 (Data In D 2) D2 D ata Out

252 SCANport Remote Data In: A2


[Rem Data In:A2]

This parameter shows the value of datalink A2


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being received from a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
This value may be used by linking other
parameters to this parameter. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-49

253 SCANport Remote Data In: B1


[Rem Data In:B1]

This parameter shows the value of datalink B1


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being received from a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
This value may be used by linking other
parameters to this parameter. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

254 SCANport Remote Data In: B2


[Rem Data In:B2]

This parameter shows the value of datalink B2


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being received from a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
This value may be used by linking other
parameters to this parameter. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

255 SCANport Remote Data In: C1


[Rem Data In:C1]
This parameter shows the value of datalink C1
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being received from a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
This value may be used by linking other
parameters to this parameter. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

256 SCANport Remote Data In: C2


[Rem Data In:C2]

This parameter shows the value of datalink C2


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being received from a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
This value may be used by linking other
parameters to this parameter. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

257 SCANport Remote Data In: D1


[Rem Data In:D1]

This parameter shows the value of datalink D1


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being received from a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
This value may be used by linking other
parameters to this parameter. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

258 SCANport Remote Data In: D2


[Rem Data In:D2]

This parameter shows the value of datalink D2


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being received from a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
This value may be used by linking other
parameters to this parameter. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

259 SCANport Remote Data Out: A1


[Rem Data Out:A1]

This parameter shows the value of datalink A1


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being passed to a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
Link this parameter to the parameter that is to be
passed through datalink A1. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-50 Programming Parameters

Sending a SCANport Im age Using SCANport Rem ote Data Out


RGU SCANport Device
RGU SCANport D evice
P259 (Data Out A1) A1 Data In
Pxxx P259
P260 (Data Out A2) A2 Data In
SCANport Datalink A1 00101011101100
P261 (Data Out B1) B1 Data In Source Rem ote
P262 (Data Out B2) B2 Data In Param eter 1 Data Out: A1 A1 Data In
(Link to Pxxx)
P263 (Data Out C1) C1 Data In
P264 (Data Out C2) C2 Data In
P265 (Data Out D1) D1 Data In
P266 (Data Out D2) D2 Data In

260 SCANport Remote Data Out: A2


[Rem Data Out:A2]

This parameter shows the value of datalink A2


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being passed to a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
Link this parameter to the parameter that is to be
passed through datalink A2. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

261 SCANport Remote Data Out: B1


[Rem Data Out:B1]

This parameter shows the value of datalink B1


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being passed to a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
Link this parameter to the parameter that is to be
passed through datalink B1. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

262 SCANport Remote Data Out: B2


[Rem Data Out:B2]

This parameter shows the value of datalink B2


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being passed to a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
Link this parameter to the parameter that is to be
passed through datalink B2. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

263 SCANport Remote Data Out: C1


[Rem Data Out:C1]

This parameter shows the value of datalink C1


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being passed to a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
Link this parameter to the parameter that is to be
passed through datalink C1. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

264 SCANport Remote Data Out: C2


[Rem Data Out:C2]

This parameter shows the value of datalink C2


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being passed to a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
Link this parameter to the parameter that is to be
passed through datalink C2. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

265 SCANport Remote Data Out: D1


[Rem Data Out:D1]

This parameter shows the value of datalink D1


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being passed to a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
Link this parameter to the parameter that is to be
passed through datalink D1. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-51

266 SCANport Remote Data Out: D2


[Rem Data Out:D2]

This parameter shows the value of datalink D2


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
which is being passed to a SCANport device. Minimum Value 0.00
Link this parameter to the parameter that is to be
passed through datalink D2. Maximum Value 65535
Related Parameters P251, P259

267 RGU-to-RGU Transmit Address


[R2R Xmit Addr]

This parameter indicates the unit address, which


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
identifies this unit when communicating on the Minimum Value 0.00
R2R network.
Maximum Value 32.00
Related Parameters P5, P271, P272
Typical RG U-to-RGU A rrangem ent
Th e first receive address (P268) for the slave un its w ill
indicate the m aster RG U's tran sm it address (P267).

NRU RGU RGU RGU RGU


(M aster) (Slave 1) (Slave 2) (Slave 3)
P267 = 0 P267 = 1 P267 = 2 P267 = 3
P268 = 1 P268 = 0 P268 = 0 P268 = 0
P269 = 2 P269 = 2 P269 = 1 P269 = 1
P270 = 3 P270 = 3 P270 = 3 P270 = 2
H ub
B oard

R 2R netw ork

268 RGU-to-RGU Receive 1 Address


[R2R Rcv Addr 1]

This parameter indicates the address of a


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
paralleled RGU on the R2R network. Minimum Value 0.00
For slave units, this parameter should indicate the Maximum Value 32.00
transmit address from the master unit (P267). Related Parameters P5, P273, P274

269 RGU-to-RGU Receive 2 Address


[R2R Rcv Addr 2]
This parameter indicates the address of a
Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
paralleled RGU on the R2R network. Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 32.00
Related Parameters P5

270 RGU-to-RGU Receive 3 Address


[R2R Rcv Addr 3]

This parameter indicate the address of a


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0.00
paralleled RGU on the R2R network. Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 32.00
Related Parameters P5

271 RGU-to-RGU Transmit Indirect 1


[R2R Xmit Ind 1]

This parameter directs the value in P96 (Iq


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 96 (Iq Current Reference)
Current Reference) to the R2R network. Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
Related Parameters P5, P96, P267

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-52 Programming Parameters

272 RGU-to-RGU Transmit Indirect 2


[R2R Xmit Ind 2]

This parameter directs the master status indicated


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 20 (Master Status)
in P20 (Master Status) to the R2R network. Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
Related Parameters P5, P20, P267

273 RGU-to-RGU Receive 1, Indirect 1


[R2R Rcv1, Ind1]

This parameter directs the Iq Current Reference


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 89 (Auxiliary Iq Current Command)
(P96) from the master to P89 (Auxiliary Iq Current Minimum Value 1
Command).
Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
Related Parameters P5, P89, P268

Master RGU Slave RGU

P96 P271 P273 P89


Iq R2R R2R Auxiliary Iq
Reference Transmit Receive 1, Current
Indirect 1 Indirect 1 Reference

274 RGU-to-RGU Receive 1, Indirect 2


[R2R Rcv1, Ind2]

This parameter receives the status from the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Source (Read Only)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 20 (Master Status)
master RGU through the R2R network. This Minimum Value 1
master status (Enabled/Faulted) is directed to P20
(Master Status). Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
Related Parameters P5, P20, P268

Master RGU Slave RGU

P20 P272 P274 P20


Master R2R R2R Master
Status Transmit Receive 1, Status
Indirect 2 Indirect 2

275-280 P275-P280 are for internal use only.

281 Scratch Pad 1


[Scratch Pad 1]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive values. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535

282 Scratch Pad 2


[Scratch Pad 2]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive values. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-53

283 Scratch Pad 3


[Scratch Pad 3]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive values. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535

284 Scratch Pad 4


[Scratch Pad 4]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive values. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535

285 Scratch Pad 5


[Scratch Pad 5]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive values. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535

286 Scratch Pad 6


[Scratch Pad 6]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive and negative values. Minimum Value -32768
Maximum Value 32767

287 Scratch Pad 7


[Scratch Pad 7]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive and negative values. Minimum Value -32768
Maximum Value 32767

288 Scratch Pad 8


[Scratch Pad 8]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive and negative values. Minimum Value -32768
Maximum Value 32767

289 Scratch Pad 9


[Scratch Pad 9]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive and negative values. Minimum Value -32768
Maximum Value 32767

290 Scratch Pad 10


[Scratch Pad 10]

This parameter can be used to store


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
miscellaneous positive and negative values. Minimum Value -32768
Maximum Value 32767

291,292 P291 and P292 are for internal use only.

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


D-54 Programming Parameters

293 Trend 1 Input Indirect


[Trend In Ind]

This parameter designates the parameter to be


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0 (no selection)
output when Trend 1 is triggered. Minimum Value 0
The source parameter defined here is passed to Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
the output (P304) when the trending operation is Related Parameters P294 to P304 (See P298)
evaluated as true.

294 Trend 1 Operand Indirect X


[Trend X Ind]

This parameter designates a source parameter to


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0 (disabled, P295 enabled)
be analyzed in the Trend 1 evaluation. The Minimum Value 0
source value is masked with the trend Y value
(P296 or P297). P295 (Trend 1 X Value) is used Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
as the trend X operand when this parameter is Related Parameters P293 to P304 (See P298)
zero (default).

295 Trend 1 X Value


[Trend X Value]

This parameter defines a constant to be masked


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
with the trend Y value (P296 or P297). Minimum Value -32768
To use this parameter, the trend X indirect (P294) Maximum Value 32767
must equal zero. Related Parameters P293 to P304 (See P298)

296 Trend 1 Operand Indirect Y


[Trend Y Ind]

This parameter designates a source parameter to


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
Parameter Number
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0 (disabled, P297 enabled)
be analyzed in the Trend 1 evaluation. The Minimum Value 0
source value masks the trend X value (P294 or
P295). Maximum Value Maximum Defined Parameter Number
Related Parameters P293 to P304 (See P298)
P297 (Trend 1 Y Value) is used instead when this
parameter equals zero (default).

297 Trend 1 Y Value


[Trend Y Value]

This parameter defines a constant to mask the


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0
trend X value (P294 or P295). Minimum Value -32768
To use this parameter, the trend Y indirect (P296) Maximum Value 32767
must equal zero. Related Parameters P293 to P304 (See P298)

Publication 2364F-5.01 October 2003


Programming Parameters D-55

298 Trend 1 Operator


[Trend Operator]

This parameter selects the operation to be


Parameter Type
Display Units
Drive Units
Sink (Read/Write)
None
Display Units * 1
Factory Default 0 (GT)
performed between trend X (P294 or P295) and Minimum Value 0
trend Y (P296 or P297). If trending is enabled
(P302), a true result of the operation will cause Maximum Value 7
the Trend 1 Input parameter value (from P293) to Related Parameters P293 to P304
be passed to the prescribed output (P293).

Value Description Value Description


0 GTSelects the operation [Trend X must be greater than Trend Y]. 4 ANDSelects the operation [Trend X AND Trend Y].
1 LTSelects the operation [Trend X must be less than Trend Y]. 5 NANDSelects the operation [Trend X NAND Trend Y].
2 EQSelects the operation [Trend X must be equal to Trend Y]. 6 ORSelects the operation [Trend X OR Trend Y].
3 NESelects the operation [Trend X must not be equal to Trend Y]. 7 NORSelects the operation [Trend X NOR Trend Y].

Pxxx Pyyy
Trend Sampling Trend Configure Trend Status
Source Source
Parameter X Parameter Y P299 P301 P303
Trend 1 Trend 1 Trend 1
Sample Mode Status
P294 P295 P296 P297 Rate
Trend 1 Trend 1 Trend 1 Trend 1
Operand X Value Operand Y Value